* config/tc-m68hc11.c: Add S12X and XGATE co-processor support.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
3 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
4 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
6 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
7 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/tc-*.c
10 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
11 @c in config/obj-*.c
12 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
13 @c %**start of header
14 @setfilename as.info
15 @c ---config---
16 @macro gcctabopt{body}
17 @code{\body\}
18 @end macro
19 @c defaults, config file may override:
20 @set have-stabs
21 @c ---
22 @c man begin NAME
23 @c ---
24 @include asconfig.texi
25 @include bfdver.texi
26 @c ---
27 @c man end
28 @c ---
29 @c common OR combinations of conditions
30 @ifset COFF
31 @set COFF-ELF
32 @end ifset
33 @ifset ELF
34 @set COFF-ELF
35 @end ifset
36 @ifset AOUT
37 @set aout-bout
38 @end ifset
39 @ifset ARM/Thumb
40 @set ARM
41 @end ifset
42 @ifset Blackfin
43 @set Blackfin
44 @end ifset
45 @ifset BOUT
46 @set aout-bout
47 @end ifset
48 @ifset H8/300
49 @set H8
50 @end ifset
51 @ifset SH
52 @set H8
53 @end ifset
54 @ifset HPPA
55 @set abnormal-separator
56 @end ifset
57 @c ------------
58 @ifset GENERIC
59 @settitle Using @value{AS}
60 @end ifset
61 @ifclear GENERIC
62 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
63 @end ifclear
64 @setchapternewpage odd
65 @c %**end of header
66
67 @c @smallbook
68 @c @set SMALL
69 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
70 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
71 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
72 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
73 @c
74 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
75 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
76 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
77 @c break.
78 @c
79 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
80 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
81 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
82 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
83 @c discretion, of course.
84 @ifinfo
85 @set SMALL
86 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
87 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
88 @end ifinfo
89
90 @ifnottex
91 @dircategory Software development
92 @direntry
93 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
94 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
95 @end direntry
96 @end ifnottex
97
98 @finalout
99 @syncodeindex ky cp
100
101 @copying
102 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
103
104 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
106 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
107 Inc.
108
109 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
110 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
111 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
112 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
113 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
114 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
115
116 @c man end
117 @end copying
118
119 @titlepage
120 @title Using @value{AS}
121 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
122 @ifclear GENERIC
123 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
124 @end ifclear
125 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
126 @sp 1
127 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
128 @end ifset
129 @sp 1
130 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
131 @sp 1
132 @sp 13
133 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
134 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
135 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
136 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
137 distracting the boss while they got some work
138 done.
139 @sp 3
140 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
141 @page
142 @tex
143 {\parskip=0pt
144 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
145 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
146 }
147 %"boxit" macro for figures:
148 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
149 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
150 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
151 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
152 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
153 @end tex
154
155 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
156 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
157 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
158 Inc.
159
160 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
161 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
162 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
163 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
164 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
165 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
166
167 @end titlepage
168 @contents
169
170 @ifnottex
171 @node Top
172 @top Using @value{AS}
173
174 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
175 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
176 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
177 @end ifset
178 version @value{VERSION}.
179 @ifclear GENERIC
180 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
181 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
182 @end ifclear
183
184 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
185 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
186 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
187
188 @menu
189 * Overview:: Overview
190 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
191 * Syntax:: Syntax
192 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
193 * Symbols:: Symbols
194 * Expressions:: Expressions
195 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
196 @ifset ELF
197 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
198 @end ifset
199 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
200 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
201 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
202 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
203 * AS Index:: AS Index
204 @end menu
205 @end ifnottex
206
207 @node Overview
208 @chapter Overview
209 @iftex
210 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
211 @ifclear GENERIC
212 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
213 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
214 @end ifclear
215 @end iftex
216
217 @cindex invocation summary
218 @cindex option summary
219 @cindex summary of options
220 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
221 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
222
223 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
224
225 @ignore
226 @c man begin SEEALSO
227 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
228 @c man end
229 @end ignore
230
231 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
232 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
233 @smallexample
234 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
235 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
236 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
237 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
238 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
239 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
240 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
241 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
242 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
243 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
244 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
245 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
246 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
251 @c Add an empty line for separation.
252 @ifset ALPHA
253
254 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
255 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
256 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
257 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
258 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
259 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
260 @end ifset
261 @ifset ARC
262
263 @emph{Target ARC options:}
264 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
265 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
266 @end ifset
267 @ifset ARM
268
269 @emph{Target ARM options:}
270 @c Don't document the deprecated options
271 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
272 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
274 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
275 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
276 [@b{-mthumb}]
277 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
279 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
280 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
281 @end ifset
282 @ifset Blackfin
283
284 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
285 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
286 [@b{-mfdpic}]
287 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
288 [@b{-mnopic}]
289 @end ifset
290 @ifset CRIS
291
292 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
293 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
294 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
295 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
296 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
297 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
298 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
299 @end ifset
300 @ifset D10V
301
302 @emph{Target D10V options:}
303 [@b{-O}]
304 @end ifset
305 @ifset D30V
306
307 @emph{Target D30V options:}
308 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
309 @end ifset
310 @ifset EPIPHANY
311
312 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
313 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
314 @end ifset
315 @ifset H8
316
317 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
318 [-h-tick-hex]
319 @end ifset
320 @ifset HPPA
321 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
322 @end ifset
323 @ifset I80386
324
325 @emph{Target i386 options:}
326 [@b{--32}|@b{--n32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
327 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
328 @end ifset
329 @ifset I960
330
331 @emph{Target i960 options:}
332 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
333 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
334 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
335 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
336 @end ifset
337 @ifset IA64
338
339 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
340 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
341 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
342 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
343 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
344 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
345 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
346 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IP2K
349
350 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
351 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
352 @end ifset
353 @ifset M32C
354
355 @emph{Target M32C options:}
356 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
357 @end ifset
358 @ifset M32R
359
360 @emph{Target M32R options:}
361 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
362 @b{--W[n]p}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M680X0
365
366 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
367 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M68HC11
370
371 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
372 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
373 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
374 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
375 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
376 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
377 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
378 @end ifset
379 @ifset MCORE
380
381 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
382 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
383 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
384 @end ifset
385 @ifset MICROBLAZE
386 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
387 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
388 @end ifset
389 @ifset MIPS
390
391 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
392 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
393 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
394 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
395 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
396 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
397 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
398 [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
399 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
400 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
401 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
402 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
403 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
404 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
405 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
406 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
407 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
408 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
409 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
410 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
411 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
412 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
413 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
414 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
415 @end ifset
416 @ifset MMIX
417
418 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
419 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
420 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
421 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
422 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
423 @end ifset
424 @ifset PDP11
425
426 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
427 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
428 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
429 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
430 @end ifset
431 @ifset PJ
432
433 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
434 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
435 @end ifset
436 @ifset PPC
437
438 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
439 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
440 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
441 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
442 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
443 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
444 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpw7}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
445 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}]
446 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
447 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
448 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
449 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
450 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
451 @end ifset
452 @ifset RX
453
454 @emph{Target RX options:}
455 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
456 [@b{-m32bit-ints}|@b{-m16bit-ints}]
457 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
458 @end ifset
459 @ifset S390
460
461 @emph{Target s390 options:}
462 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
463 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
464 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
465 @end ifset
466 @ifset SCORE
467
468 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
469 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
470 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
471 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
472 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
473 @end ifset
474 @ifset SPARC
475
476 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
477 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
478 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
479 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
480 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
481 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
482 @end ifset
483 @ifset TIC54X
484
485 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
486 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
487 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
488 @end ifset
489
490 @ifset TIC6X
491
492 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
493 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
494 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
495 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
496 @end ifset
497 @ifset TILEGX
498
499 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
500 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset TILEPRO
503 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
504 @end ifset
505
506 @ifset XTENSA
507
508 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
509 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
510 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
511 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
512 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
513 @end ifset
514
515 @ifset Z80
516
517 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
518 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
519 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
520 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
521 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
522 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
523 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
524 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
525 @end ifset
526
527 @ifset Z8000
528 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
529 @end ifset
530
531 @c man end
532 @end smallexample
533
534 @c man begin OPTIONS
535
536 @table @gcctabopt
537 @include at-file.texi
538
539 @item -a[cdghlmns]
540 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
541
542 @table @gcctabopt
543 @item -ac
544 omit false conditionals
545
546 @item -ad
547 omit debugging directives
548
549 @item -ag
550 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
551
552 @item -ah
553 include high-level source
554
555 @item -al
556 include assembly
557
558 @item -am
559 include macro expansions
560
561 @item -an
562 omit forms processing
563
564 @item -as
565 include symbols
566
567 @item =file
568 set the name of the listing file
569 @end table
570
571 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
572 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
573 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
574
575 @item --alternate
576 Begin in alternate macro mode.
577 @ifclear man
578 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
579 @end ifclear
580
581 @item --compress-debug-sections
582 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
583 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
584 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
585
586 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
587 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
588
589 @item -D
590 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
591 other assemblers.
592
593 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
594 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
595 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
596
597 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
598 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
599 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
600 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
601 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
602 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
603
604 @item -f
605 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
606 compiler output).
607
608 @item -g
609 @itemx --gen-debug
610 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
611 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
612 ECOFF or DWARF2.
613
614 @item --gstabs
615 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
616 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
617
618 @item --gstabs+
619 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
620 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
621 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
622 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
623 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
624
625 @item --gdwarf-2
626 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
627 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
628 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
629
630 @item --size-check=error
631 @itemx --size-check=warning
632 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
633
634 @item --help
635 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
636
637 @item --target-help
638 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
639
640 @item -I @var{dir}
641 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
642
643 @item -J
644 Don't warn about signed overflow.
645
646 @item -K
647 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
648 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
649 @end ifclear
650 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
651 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
652 @end ifset
653
654 @item -L
655 @itemx --keep-locals
656 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
657 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
658 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
659 @ifclear man
660 @xref{Symbol Names}.
661 @end ifclear
662
663 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
664 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
665 listing to @var{number}.
666
667 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
668 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
669 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
670
671 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
672 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
673 @var{number} bytes.
674
675 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
676 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
677 to @var{number} + 1.
678
679 @item -o @var{objfile}
680 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
681
682 @item -R
683 Fold the data section into the text section.
684
685 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
686 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
687 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
688 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
689 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
690 requirements at the expense of speed.
691
692 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
693 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
694 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
695 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
696
697 @item --statistics
698 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
699 assembly.
700
701 @item --strip-local-absolute
702 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
703
704 @item -v
705 @itemx -version
706 Print the @command{as} version.
707
708 @item --version
709 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
710
711 @item -W
712 @itemx --no-warn
713 Suppress warning messages.
714
715 @item --fatal-warnings
716 Treat warnings as errors.
717
718 @item --warn
719 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
720
721 @item -w
722 Ignored.
723
724 @item -x
725 Ignored.
726
727 @item -Z
728 Generate an object file even after errors.
729
730 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
731 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
732
733 @end table
734 @c man end
735
736 @ifset ALPHA
737
738 @ifclear man
739 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
740 for an Alpha processor.
741 @end ifclear
742
743 @ifset man
744 @c man begin OPTIONS
745 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
746 processor.
747 @c man end
748 @c man begin INCLUDE
749 @include c-alpha.texi
750 @c ended inside the included file
751 @end ifset
752
753 @end ifset
754
755 @c man begin OPTIONS
756 @ifset ARC
757 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
758 an ARC processor.
759
760 @table @gcctabopt
761 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
762 This option selects the core processor variant.
763 @item -EB | -EL
764 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
765 @end table
766 @end ifset
767
768 @ifset ARM
769 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
770 processor family.
771
772 @table @gcctabopt
773 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
774 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
775 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
776 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
777 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
778 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
779 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
780 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
781 @item -mthumb
782 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
783 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
784 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
785 @item -EB | -EL
786 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
787 @item -mthumb-interwork
788 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
789 ARM code in mind.
790 @item -k
791 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
792 @end table
793 @end ifset
794 @c man end
795
796 @ifset Blackfin
797
798 @ifclear man
799 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
800 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
801 @end ifclear
802
803 @ifset man
804 @c man begin OPTIONS
805 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
806 the Blackfin processor family.
807 @c man end
808 @c man begin INCLUDE
809 @include c-bfin.texi
810 @c ended inside the included file
811 @end ifset
812
813 @end ifset
814
815 @c man begin OPTIONS
816 @ifset CRIS
817 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
818 @end ifset
819
820 @ifset D10V
821 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
822 a D10V processor.
823 @table @gcctabopt
824 @cindex D10V optimization
825 @cindex optimization, D10V
826 @item -O
827 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
828 @end table
829 @end ifset
830
831 @ifset D30V
832 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
833 processor.
834 @table @gcctabopt
835 @cindex D30V optimization
836 @cindex optimization, D30V
837 @item -O
838 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
839
840 @cindex D30V nops
841 @item -n
842 Warn when nops are generated.
843
844 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
845 @item -N
846 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
847 @end table
848 @end ifset
849 @c man end
850
851 @ifset EPIPHANY
852 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
853 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
854
855 @ifclear man
856 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
857 configured for an Epiphany processor.
858 @end ifclear
859
860 @ifset man
861 @c man begin OPTIONS
862 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
863 an Epiphany processor.
864 @c man end
865 @c man begin INCLUDE
866 @include c-epiphany.texi
867 @c ended inside the included file
868 @end ifset
869
870 @end ifset
871
872 @ifset I80386
873
874 @ifclear man
875 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
876 configured for an i386 processor.
877 @end ifclear
878
879 @ifset man
880 @c man begin OPTIONS
881 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
882 an i386 processor.
883 @c man end
884 @c man begin INCLUDE
885 @include c-i386.texi
886 @c ended inside the included file
887 @end ifset
888
889 @end ifset
890
891 @c man begin OPTIONS
892 @ifset I960
893 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
894 Intel 80960 processor.
895
896 @table @gcctabopt
897 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
898 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
899
900 @item -b
901 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
902
903 @item -no-relax
904 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
905 error if necessary.
906
907 @end table
908 @end ifset
909
910 @ifset IP2K
911 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
912 Ubicom IP2K series.
913
914 @table @gcctabopt
915
916 @item -mip2022ext
917 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
918
919 @item -mip2022
920 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
921 just the basic IP2022 ones.
922
923 @end table
924 @end ifset
925
926 @ifset M32C
927 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
928 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
929
930 @table @gcctabopt
931
932 @item -m32c
933 Assemble M32C instructions.
934
935 @item -m16c
936 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
937
938 @item -relax
939 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
940
941 @item -h-tick-hex
942 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
943
944 @end table
945 @end ifset
946
947 @ifset M32R
948 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
949 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
950
951 @table @gcctabopt
952
953 @item --m32rx
954 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
955 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
956
957 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
958 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
959 encountered.
960
961 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
962 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
963 encountered.
964
965 @end table
966 @end ifset
967
968 @ifset M680X0
969 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
970 Motorola 68000 series.
971
972 @table @gcctabopt
973
974 @item -l
975 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
976
977 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
978 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
979 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
980 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
981 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
982
983 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
984 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
985 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
986 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
987 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
988 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
989
990 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
991 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
992 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
993
994 @end table
995 @end ifset
996
997 @ifset PDP11
998
999 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1000 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1001
1002 @table @gcctabopt
1003 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1004 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1005 default is @option{-mpic}.
1006
1007 @item -mall
1008 @itemx -mall-extensions
1009 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1010
1011 @item -mno-extensions
1012 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1013
1014 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1015 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1016
1017 @item -m@var{cpu}
1018 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1019 disable all other extensions.
1020
1021 @item -m@var{machine}
1022 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1023 model, and disable all other extensions.
1024 @end table
1025
1026 @end ifset
1027
1028 @ifset PJ
1029 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1030 a picoJava processor.
1031
1032 @table @gcctabopt
1033
1034 @cindex PJ endianness
1035 @cindex endianness, PJ
1036 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1037 @item -mb
1038 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1039
1040 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1041 @item -ml
1042 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1043
1044 @end table
1045 @end ifset
1046
1047 @ifset M68HC11
1048 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1049 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1050
1051 @table @gcctabopt
1052
1053 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1054 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1055 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1056
1057 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1058 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1059 XGATE address space.
1060
1061 @item -mshort
1062 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1063
1064 @item -mlong
1065 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1066
1067 @item -mshort-double
1068 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1069
1070 @item -mlong-double
1071 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1072
1073 @item --force-long-branches
1074 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1075 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1076 sub routine.
1077
1078 @item -S | --short-branches
1079 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1080 when the offset is out of range.
1081
1082 @item --strict-direct-mode
1083 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1084 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1085
1086 @item --print-insn-syntax
1087 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1088
1089 @item --print-opcodes
1090 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1091
1092 @item --generate-example
1093 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1094 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1095
1096 @end table
1097 @end ifset
1098
1099 @ifset SPARC
1100 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1101 for the SPARC architecture:
1102
1103 @table @gcctabopt
1104 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1105 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1106 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1107
1108 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1109 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1110
1111 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1112 UltraSPARC extensions.
1113
1114 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1115 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1116 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1117
1118 @item -bump
1119 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1120 @end table
1121 @end ifset
1122
1123 @ifset TIC54X
1124 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1125 architecture.
1126
1127 @table @gcctabopt
1128 @item -mfar-mode
1129 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1130 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1131 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1132 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1133 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1134 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1135 behaviour in the shell.
1136 @end table
1137 @end ifset
1138
1139 @ifset MIPS
1140 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1141 a @sc{mips} processor.
1142
1143 @table @gcctabopt
1144 @item -G @var{num}
1145 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1146 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1147 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1148
1149 @cindex MIPS endianness
1150 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1151 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1152 @item -EB
1153 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1154
1155 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1156 @item -EL
1157 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1158
1159 @cindex MIPS ISA
1160 @item -mips1
1161 @itemx -mips2
1162 @itemx -mips3
1163 @itemx -mips4
1164 @itemx -mips5
1165 @itemx -mips32
1166 @itemx -mips32r2
1167 @itemx -mips64
1168 @itemx -mips64r2
1169 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} Instruction Set Architecture level.
1170 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1171 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1172 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1173 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1174 @samp{-mips64r2}
1175 correspond to generic
1176 @samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1177 and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1178 ISA processors, respectively.
1179
1180 @item -march=@var{CPU}
1181 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1182
1183 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1184 Schedule and tune for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1185
1186 @item -mfix7000
1187 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1188 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1189 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1190
1191 @item -mdebug
1192 @itemx -no-mdebug
1193 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1194 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1195
1196 @item -mpdr
1197 @itemx -mno-pdr
1198 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1199
1200 @item -mgp32
1201 @itemx -mfp32
1202 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1203 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1204 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1205 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1206
1207 @item -mips16
1208 @itemx -no-mips16
1209 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1210 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1211 turns off this option.
1212
1213 @item -mmicromips
1214 @itemx -mno-micromips
1215 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1216 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1217 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1218 at the start of the assembly file.
1219
1220 @item -msmartmips
1221 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1222 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1223 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1224 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1225
1226 @item -mips3d
1227 @itemx -no-mips3d
1228 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1229 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1230 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1231
1232 @item -mdmx
1233 @itemx -no-mdmx
1234 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1235 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1236 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1237
1238 @item -mdsp
1239 @itemx -mno-dsp
1240 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1241 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1242 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1243
1244 @item -mdspr2
1245 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1246 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1247 This option implies -mdsp.
1248 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1249 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1250
1251 @item -mmt
1252 @itemx -mno-mt
1253 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1254 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1255 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1256
1257 @item -mmcu
1258 @itemx -mno-mcu
1259 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1260 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1261 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1262
1263 @item --construct-floats
1264 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1265 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1266 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1267 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1268 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1269 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1270
1271 @cindex emulation
1272 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1273 This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured
1274 for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing
1275 between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
1276 debugging information or store symbol table information, and default
1277 endianness. The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff},
1278 @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf},
1279 @samp{mipsbelf}. The first two do not alter the default endianness from that
1280 of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change
1281 the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l}
1282 in the name. Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness
1283 selection in any case.
1284
1285 This option is currently supported only when the primary target
1286 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a @sc{mips} ELF or ECOFF target.
1287 Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with
1288 @samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for
1289 the other format, if both are to be available. For example, the Irix 5
1290 configuration includes support for both.
1291
1292 Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
1293 fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for
1294 more processors.
1295
1296 @item -nocpp
1297 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1298 the native tools.
1299
1300 @item --trap
1301 @itemx --no-trap
1302 @itemx --break
1303 @itemx --no-break
1304 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1305 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1306 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1307 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1308 break exception.
1309
1310 @item -n
1311 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1312 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1313 @end table
1314 @end ifset
1315
1316 @ifset MCORE
1317 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1318 an MCore processor.
1319
1320 @table @gcctabopt
1321 @item -jsri2bsr
1322 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1323 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1324 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1325
1326 @item -sifilter
1327 @itemx -nosifilter
1328 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1329 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1330
1331 @item -relax
1332 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1333
1334 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1335 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1336 can be assembled.
1337
1338 @item -EB
1339 Assemble for a big endian target.
1340
1341 @item -EL
1342 Assemble for a little endian target.
1343
1344 @end table
1345 @end ifset
1346
1347 @ifset MMIX
1348 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1349 @end ifset
1350
1351 @c man end
1352 @ifset PPC
1353
1354 @ifclear man
1355 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1356 for a PowerPC processor.
1357 @end ifclear
1358
1359 @ifset man
1360 @c man begin OPTIONS
1361 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1362 PowerPC processor.
1363 @c man end
1364 @c man begin INCLUDE
1365 @include c-ppc.texi
1366 @c ended inside the included file
1367 @end ifset
1368
1369 @end ifset
1370
1371 @c man begin OPTIONS
1372 @ifset RX
1373 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1374 @end ifset
1375
1376 @ifset S390
1377 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1378 processor family.
1379
1380 @table @gcctabopt
1381 @item -m31
1382 @itemx -m64
1383 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1384 @item -mesa
1385 @item -mzarch
1386 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1387 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1388 @item -march=@var{processor}
1389 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1390 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, or @samp{z10}.
1391 @item -mregnames
1392 @itemx -mno-regnames
1393 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1394 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1395 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1396 but evaluates to zero.
1397 @end table
1398 @end ifset
1399 @c man end
1400
1401 @ifset TIC6X
1402
1403 @ifclear man
1404 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1405 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1406 @end ifclear
1407
1408 @ifset man
1409 @c man begin OPTIONS
1410 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1411 TMS320C6000 processor.
1412 @c man end
1413 @c man begin INCLUDE
1414 @include c-tic6x.texi
1415 @c ended inside the included file
1416 @end ifset
1417
1418 @end ifset
1419
1420 @ifset TILEGX
1421
1422 @ifclear man
1423 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1424 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1425 @end ifclear
1426
1427 @ifset man
1428 @c man begin OPTIONS
1429 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1430 processor.
1431 @c man end
1432 @c man begin INCLUDE
1433 @include c-tilegx.texi
1434 @c ended inside the included file
1435 @end ifset
1436
1437 @end ifset
1438
1439 @ifset XTENSA
1440
1441 @ifclear man
1442 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1443 for an Xtensa processor.
1444 @end ifclear
1445
1446 @ifset man
1447 @c man begin OPTIONS
1448 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1449 Xtensa processor.
1450 @c man end
1451 @c man begin INCLUDE
1452 @include c-xtensa.texi
1453 @c ended inside the included file
1454 @end ifset
1455
1456 @end ifset
1457
1458 @c man begin OPTIONS
1459
1460 @ifset Z80
1461 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1462 a Z80 family processor.
1463 @table @gcctabopt
1464 @item -z80
1465 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1466 @item -r800
1467 Assemble for R800 processor.
1468 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1469 @itemx -Wnud
1470 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1471 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1472 @itemx -Wnup
1473 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1474 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1475 @itemx -Wud
1476 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1477 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1478 @itemx -Wup
1479 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1480 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1481 @itemx -Fud
1482 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1483 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1484 @itemx -Fup
1485 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1486 @end table
1487 @end ifset
1488
1489 @c man end
1490
1491 @menu
1492 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1493 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1494 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1495 * Command Line:: Command Line
1496 * Input Files:: Input Files
1497 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1498 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1499 @end menu
1500
1501 @node Manual
1502 @section Structure of this Manual
1503
1504 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1505 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1506 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1507 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1508 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1509
1510 @ifclear GENERIC
1511 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1512 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1513 @end ifclear
1514 @ifset GENERIC
1515 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1516 various flavors of the assembler.
1517 @end ifset
1518
1519 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1520 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1521 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1522 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1523 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1524 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1525 particular architecture.
1526 @ifset GENERIC
1527 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1528 machine architecture manual for this information.
1529 @end ifset
1530 @ifclear GENERIC
1531 @ifset H8/300
1532 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1533 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1534 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1535 @end ifset
1536 @ifset SH
1537 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1538 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1539 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1540 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1541 @end ifset
1542 @ifset Z8000
1543 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1544 @end ifset
1545 @end ifclear
1546
1547 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1548 @ignore
1549 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1550 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1551 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1552 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1553 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1554 qualification.
1555
1556 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1557 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1558 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1559 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1560 @end ignore
1561
1562 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1563 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1564 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1565 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1566 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1567 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1568 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1569 @c directives).
1570
1571 @node GNU Assembler
1572 @section The GNU Assembler
1573
1574 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1575
1576 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1577 @ifclear GENERIC
1578 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1579 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1580 @end ifclear
1581 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1582 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1583 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1584 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1585 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1586
1587 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1588 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1589 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1590 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1591 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1592 machine would assemble.
1593 @ifset VAX
1594 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1595 @end ifset
1596 @ifset M680X0
1597 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1598 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1599 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1600 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1601 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1602 @end ifset
1603
1604 @c man end
1605
1606 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1607 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1608 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1609
1610 @node Object Formats
1611 @section Object File Formats
1612
1613 @cindex object file format
1614 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1615 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1616 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1617 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1618 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1619 @ifclear GENERIC
1620 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1621 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1622 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1623 @end ifclear
1624 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1625 @ifset I960
1626 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1627 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1628 @end ifset
1629 @ifset HPPA
1630 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1631 SOM or ELF format object files.
1632 @end ifset
1633 @end ifclear
1634
1635 @node Command Line
1636 @section Command Line
1637
1638 @cindex command line conventions
1639
1640 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1641 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1642 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1643 significant.
1644
1645 @cindex standard input, as input file
1646 @kindex --
1647 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1648 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1649
1650 @cindex options, command line
1651 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1652 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1653 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1654 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1655 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1656
1657 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1658 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1659 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1660 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1661
1662 @smallexample
1663 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1664 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1665 @end smallexample
1666
1667 @node Input Files
1668 @section Input Files
1669
1670 @cindex input
1671 @cindex source program
1672 @cindex files, input
1673 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1674 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1675 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1676 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1677
1678 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1679 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1680 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1681 order specified.
1682
1683 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1684 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1685 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1686 (The standard input is also a file.)
1687
1688 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1689 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1690 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1691 is taken to be an input file name.
1692
1693 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1694 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1695 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1696 to assemble.
1697
1698 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1699 in your command line.
1700
1701 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1702 file.
1703
1704 @c man end
1705
1706 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1707
1708 @cindex input file linenumbers
1709 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1710 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1711 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1712 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1713 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1714
1715 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1716 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1717
1718 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1719 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1720 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1721 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1722 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1723 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1724
1725 @node Object
1726 @section Output (Object) File
1727
1728 @cindex object file
1729 @cindex output file
1730 @kindex a.out
1731 @kindex .o
1732 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1733 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1734 is the object file. Its default name is
1735 @ifclear BOUT
1736 @code{a.out}.
1737 @end ifclear
1738 @ifset BOUT
1739 @ifset GENERIC
1740 @code{a.out}, or
1741 @end ifset
1742 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1743 @end ifset
1744 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1745 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1746 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1747 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1748 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1749
1750 @cindex linker
1751 @kindex ld
1752 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1753 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1754 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1755 information for the debugger.
1756
1757 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1758 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1759
1760 @node Errors
1761 @section Error and Warning Messages
1762
1763 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1764
1765 @cindex error messages
1766 @cindex warning messages
1767 @cindex messages from assembler
1768 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1769 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1770 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1771 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1772 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1773
1774 @c man end
1775
1776 @cindex format of warning messages
1777 Warning messages have the format
1778
1779 @smallexample
1780 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1781 @end smallexample
1782
1783 @noindent
1784 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1785 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1786 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1787 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1788 @ifset GENERIC
1789 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1790 @end ifset
1791 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1792 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1793 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1794 tradition).
1795
1796 @cindex format of error messages
1797 Error messages have the format
1798 @smallexample
1799 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1800 @end smallexample
1801 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1802 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1803 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1804
1805 @node Invoking
1806 @chapter Command-Line Options
1807
1808 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1809 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1810 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1811 for options specific
1812 @ifclear GENERIC
1813 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1814 @end ifclear
1815 @ifset GENERIC
1816 to particular machine architectures.
1817 @end ifset
1818
1819 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1820
1821 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1822 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1823 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1824 by commas. For example:
1825
1826 @smallexample
1827 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1828 @end smallexample
1829
1830 @noindent
1831 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1832 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1833 local symbols in the symbol table).
1834
1835 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1836 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1837 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1838 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1839 assembler.)
1840
1841 @c man end
1842
1843 @menu
1844 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1845 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1846 * D:: -D for compatibility
1847 * f:: -f to work faster
1848 * I:: -I for .include search path
1849 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1850 * K:: -K for compatibility
1851 @end ifclear
1852 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1853 * K:: -K for difference tables
1854 @end ifset
1855
1856 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
1857 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1858 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1859 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
1860 * o:: -o to name the object file
1861 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
1862 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1863 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1864 * v:: -v to announce version
1865 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1866 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
1867 @end menu
1868
1869 @node a
1870 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1871
1872 @kindex -a
1873 @kindex -ac
1874 @kindex -ad
1875 @kindex -ag
1876 @kindex -ah
1877 @kindex -al
1878 @kindex -an
1879 @kindex -as
1880 @cindex listings, enabling
1881 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
1882
1883 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
1884 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1885 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1886 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1887 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1888 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1889 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1890 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1891 also.
1892
1893 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1894 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
1895
1896 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
1897 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
1898 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
1899 omitted from the listing.
1900
1901 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
1902 listing.
1903
1904 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
1905 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
1906 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
1907 @code{.sbttl}.
1908 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
1909 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
1910 listing-control directives have no effect.
1911
1912 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
1913 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
1914
1915 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
1916 because it
1917 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
1918 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
1919 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
1920 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
1921 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
1922
1923 @node alternate
1924 @section @option{--alternate}
1925
1926 @kindex --alternate
1927 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
1928
1929 @node D
1930 @section @option{-D}
1931
1932 @kindex -D
1933 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
1934 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
1935 @command{@value{AS}}.
1936
1937 @node f
1938 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
1939
1940 @kindex -f
1941 @cindex trusted compiler
1942 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
1943 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
1944 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
1945 and comment preprocessing on
1946 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
1947 ,Preprocessing}.
1948
1949 @quotation
1950 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
1951 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
1952 not work correctly.
1953 @end quotation
1954
1955 @node I
1956 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
1957
1958 @kindex -I @var{path}
1959 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
1960 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
1961 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
1962 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
1963 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
1964 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
1965 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
1966 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
1967 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
1968 specified (left to right) on the command line.
1969
1970 @node K
1971 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
1972
1973 @kindex -K
1974 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1975 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
1976 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
1977 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
1978 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
1979 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
1980 alteration on other platforms.
1981 @end ifclear
1982
1983 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1984 @cindex difference tables, warning
1985 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
1986 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
1987 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
1988 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
1989 is done.
1990 @end ifset
1991
1992 @node L
1993 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
1994
1995 @kindex -L
1996 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
1997 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
1998 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
1999 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2000 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2001 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2002 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2003 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2004
2005 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2006 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2007 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2008
2009 @node listing
2010 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2011
2012 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2013 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2014 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2015 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2016 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2017 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2018 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2019 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2020
2021 @table @gcctabopt
2022 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2023 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2024 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2025 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2026 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2027
2028 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2029 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2030 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2031 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2032 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2033 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2034 switch is used the default is to one.
2035
2036 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2037 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2038 @cindex Width of source line output
2039 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2040 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2041 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2042
2043 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2044 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2045 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2046 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2047 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2048 @end table
2049
2050 @node M
2051 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2052
2053 @kindex -M
2054 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2055 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2056 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2057 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2058 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2059 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2060 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2061 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2062 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2063
2064 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2065 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2066 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2067 individually. These are:
2068
2069 @itemize @bullet
2070 @item global symbols in common section
2071
2072 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2073 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2074 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2075 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2076 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2077
2078 @item complex relocations
2079
2080 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2081 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2082 are not support by other object file formats.
2083
2084 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2085
2086 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2087 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2088 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2089 script.
2090
2091 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2092
2093 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2094 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2095
2096 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2097
2098 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2099 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2100 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2101 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2102 assigned within a linker script.
2103 @end itemize
2104
2105 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2106 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2107 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2108
2109 @itemize @bullet
2110
2111 @item EBCDIC strings
2112
2113 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2114
2115 @item packed binary coded decimal
2116
2117 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2118 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2119
2120 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2121
2122 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2123
2124 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2125
2126 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2127
2128 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2129
2130 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2131 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2132 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2133 these options serve no purpose.
2134
2135 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2136
2137 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2138 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2139 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2140
2141 @item other @code{OPT} options
2142
2143 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2144 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2145
2146 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2147
2148 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2149 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2150
2151 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2152
2153 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2154
2155 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2156
2157 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2158
2159 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2160
2161 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2162
2163 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2164
2165 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2166
2167 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2168
2169 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2170
2171 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2172
2173 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2174
2175 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2176
2177 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2178
2179 @end itemize
2180
2181 @node MD
2182 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2183
2184 @kindex --MD
2185 @cindex dependency tracking
2186 @cindex make rules
2187
2188 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2189 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2190 dependencies of the main source file.
2191
2192 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2193
2194 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2195
2196 @node o
2197 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2198
2199 @kindex -o
2200 @cindex naming object file
2201 @cindex object file name
2202 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2203 default it has the name
2204 @ifset GENERIC
2205 @ifset I960
2206 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2207 @end ifset
2208 @ifclear I960
2209 @file{a.out}.
2210 @end ifclear
2211 @end ifset
2212 @ifclear GENERIC
2213 @ifset I960
2214 @file{b.out}.
2215 @end ifset
2216 @ifclear I960
2217 @file{a.out}.
2218 @end ifclear
2219 @end ifclear
2220 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2221 object file a different name.
2222
2223 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2224 existing file of the same name.
2225
2226 @node R
2227 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2228
2229 @kindex -R
2230 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2231 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2232 @cindex joining text and data sections
2233 @cindex merging text and data sections
2234 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2235 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2236 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2237 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2238 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2239 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2240
2241 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2242 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2243 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2244 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2245
2246 @ifset COFF-ELF
2247 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2248 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2249 @samp{.data}.
2250 @end ifset
2251
2252 @ifset HPPA
2253 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2254 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2255 @end ifset
2256
2257 @node statistics
2258 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2259
2260 @kindex --statistics
2261 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2262 @cindex time, total for assembly
2263 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2264 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2265 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2266 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2267 seconds).
2268
2269 @node traditional-format
2270 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2271
2272 @kindex --traditional-format
2273 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2274 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2275 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2276
2277 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2278 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2279
2280 @node v
2281 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2282
2283 @kindex -v
2284 @kindex -version
2285 @cindex assembler version
2286 @cindex version of assembler
2287 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2288 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2289 command line.
2290
2291 @node W
2292 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2293
2294 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2295 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2296 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2297 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2298
2299 @kindex -W
2300 @kindex --no-warn
2301 @cindex suppressing warnings
2302 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2303 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2304 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2305 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2306 are still reported.
2307
2308 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2309 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2310 @cindex warnings, causing error
2311 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2312 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2313
2314 @kindex --warn
2315 @cindex warnings, switching on
2316 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2317 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2318
2319 @node Z
2320 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2321 @cindex object file, after errors
2322 @cindex errors, continuing after
2323 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2324 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2325 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2326 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2327 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2328 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2329
2330 @node Syntax
2331 @chapter Syntax
2332
2333 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2334 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2335 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2336 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2337 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2338 @ifclear VAX
2339 assembler.
2340 @end ifclear
2341 @ifset VAX
2342 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2343 @end ifset
2344
2345 @menu
2346 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2347 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2348 * Comments:: Comments
2349 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2350 * Statements:: Statements
2351 * Constants:: Constants
2352 @end menu
2353
2354 @node Preprocessing
2355 @section Preprocessing
2356
2357 @cindex preprocessing
2358 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2359 @itemize @bullet
2360 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2361 @item
2362 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2363 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2364 a single space.
2365
2366 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2367 @item
2368 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2369 appropriate number of newlines.
2370
2371 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2372 @item
2373 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2374 @end itemize
2375
2376 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2377 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2378 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2379 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2380 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2381 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2382 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2383
2384 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2385 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2386 preprocessed.
2387
2388 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2389 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2390 @kindex #NO_APP
2391 @kindex #APP
2392 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2393 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2394 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2395 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2396 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2397 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2398 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2399 and whitespace.
2400
2401 @node Whitespace
2402 @section Whitespace
2403
2404 @cindex whitespace
2405 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2406 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2407 people to read. Unless within character constants
2408 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2409 as exactly one space.
2410
2411 @node Comments
2412 @section Comments
2413
2414 @cindex comments
2415 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2416 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2417
2418 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2419 This means you may not nest these comments.
2420
2421 @smallexample
2422 /*
2423 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2424 is to use this sort of comment.
2425 */
2426
2427 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2428 @end smallexample
2429
2430 @cindex line comment character
2431 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2432 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2433 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2434 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2435 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2436 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2437 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2438 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2439
2440 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2441 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2442 to specify logical line numbers:
2443
2444 @kindex #
2445 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2446 @cindex logical line numbers
2447 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2448 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2449 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2450 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2451 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2452
2453 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2454 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2455
2456 @smallexample
2457 # This is an ordinary comment.
2458 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2459 # This is logical line # 36.
2460 @end smallexample
2461 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2462 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2463
2464 @node Symbol Intro
2465 @section Symbols
2466
2467 @cindex characters used in symbols
2468 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2469 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2470 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2471 @samp{_.$}.
2472 @end ifclear
2473 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2474 @ifclear GENERIC
2475 @ifset H8
2476 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2477 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2478 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2479 symbol names.)
2480 @end ifset
2481 @end ifclear
2482 @end ifset
2483 @ifset GENERIC
2484 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2485 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2486 @end ifset
2487 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2488 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Symbols are
2489 delimited by characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file
2490 (since the source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is
2491 not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2492 @cindex length of symbols
2493
2494 @node Statements
2495 @section Statements
2496
2497 @cindex statements, structure of
2498 @cindex line separator character
2499 @cindex statement separator character
2500
2501 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2502 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2503 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2504 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2505 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2506 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2507 exception: they do not end statements.
2508
2509 @cindex newline, required at file end
2510 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2511 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2512 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2513
2514 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2515
2516 @cindex instructions and directives
2517 @cindex directives and instructions
2518 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2519 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2520 @c 13feb91.
2521 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2522 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2523 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2524 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2525 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2526 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2527 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2528 @ifset GENERIC
2529 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2530 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2531 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2532 language.@refill
2533 @end ifset
2534
2535 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2536 @cindex label (@code{:})
2537 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2538 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2539 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2540
2541 @ifset HPPA
2542 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2543 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2544 only one label may be defined on each line.
2545 @end ifset
2546
2547 @smallexample
2548 label: .directive followed by something
2549 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2550 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2551 @end smallexample
2552
2553 @node Constants
2554 @section Constants
2555
2556 @cindex constants
2557 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2558 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2559 @smallexample
2560 @group
2561 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2562 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2563 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2564 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2565 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2566 @end group
2567 @end smallexample
2568
2569 @menu
2570 * Characters:: Character Constants
2571 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2572 @end menu
2573
2574 @node Characters
2575 @subsection Character Constants
2576
2577 @cindex character constants
2578 @cindex constants, character
2579 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2580 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2581 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2582 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2583 used in arithmetic expressions.
2584
2585 @menu
2586 * Strings:: Strings
2587 * Chars:: Characters
2588 @end menu
2589
2590 @node Strings
2591 @subsubsection Strings
2592
2593 @cindex string constants
2594 @cindex constants, string
2595 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2596 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2597 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2598 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2599 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2600 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2601 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2602 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2603
2604 @cindex escape codes, character
2605 @cindex character escape codes
2606 @table @kbd
2607 @c @item \a
2608 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2609 @c
2610 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2611 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2612 @item \b
2613 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2614
2615 @c @item \e
2616 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2617 @c
2618 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2619 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2620 @item \f
2621 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2622
2623 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2624 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2625 @item \n
2626 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2627
2628 @c @item \p
2629 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2630 @c
2631 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2632 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2633 @item \r
2634 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2635
2636 @c @item \s
2637 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2638 @c other assemblers.
2639 @c
2640 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2641 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2642 @item \t
2643 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2644
2645 @c @item \v
2646 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2647 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2648 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2649 @c
2650 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2651 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2652 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2653 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2654 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2655 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2656
2657 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2658 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2659 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2660 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2661 lower case @code{x} works.
2662
2663 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2664 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2665 @item \\
2666 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2667
2668 @c @item \'
2669 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2670 @c This is needed in single character literals
2671 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2672 @c a @samp{'}.
2673 @c
2674 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2675 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2676 @item \"
2677 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2678 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2679
2680 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2681 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2682 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2683 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2684 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2685 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2686 code and warns you of the fact.
2687 @end table
2688
2689 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2690 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2691 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2692 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2693 sequence.
2694
2695 @node Chars
2696 @subsubsection Characters
2697
2698 @cindex single character constant
2699 @cindex character, single
2700 @cindex constant, single character
2701 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2702 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2703 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2704 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2705 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2706 grave accent. A newline
2707 @ifclear GENERIC
2708 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2709 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2710 @end ifclear
2711 @ifset abnormal-separator
2712 @ifset H8
2713 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2714 Renesas SH)
2715 @end ifset
2716 @end ifset
2717 @end ifclear
2718 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2719 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2720 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2721 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2722 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2723
2724 @node Numbers
2725 @subsection Number Constants
2726
2727 @cindex constants, number
2728 @cindex number constants
2729 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2730 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2731 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2732 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2733 are floating point numbers, described below.
2734
2735 @menu
2736 * Integers:: Integers
2737 * Bignums:: Bignums
2738 * Flonums:: Flonums
2739 @ifclear GENERIC
2740 @ifset I960
2741 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2742 @end ifset
2743 @end ifclear
2744 @end menu
2745
2746 @node Integers
2747 @subsubsection Integers
2748 @cindex integers
2749 @cindex constants, integer
2750
2751 @cindex binary integers
2752 @cindex integers, binary
2753 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2754 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2755
2756 @cindex octal integers
2757 @cindex integers, octal
2758 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2759 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2760
2761 @cindex decimal integers
2762 @cindex integers, decimal
2763 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2764 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2765
2766 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2767 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2768 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2769 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2770
2771 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2772 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2773 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2774
2775 @node Bignums
2776 @subsubsection Bignums
2777
2778 @cindex bignums
2779 @cindex constants, bignum
2780 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2781 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2782 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2783 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2784
2785 @node Flonums
2786 @subsubsection Flonums
2787 @cindex flonums
2788 @cindex floating point numbers
2789 @cindex constants, floating point
2790
2791 @cindex precision, floating point
2792 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2793 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2794 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2795 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2796 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2797 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2798
2799 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2800 @itemize @bullet
2801 @item
2802 The digit @samp{0}.
2803 @ifset HPPA
2804 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2805 @end ifset
2806
2807 @item
2808 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2809 @ifset GENERIC
2810 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2811 @ignore
2812 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2813 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2814 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2815 @end ignore
2816
2817 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2818 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2819 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2820
2821 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2822 (in upper or lower case).
2823
2824 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2825 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2826
2827 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2828 @end ifset
2829 @ifclear GENERIC
2830 @ifset ARC
2831 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2832 @end ifset
2833 @ifset H8
2834 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2835 @end ifset
2836 @ifset HPPA
2837 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2838 @end ifset
2839 @ifset I960
2840 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2841 @end ifset
2842 @end ifclear
2843
2844 @item
2845 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2846
2847 @item
2848 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2849
2850 @item
2851 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2852 or more decimal digits.
2853
2854 @item
2855 An optional exponent, consisting of:
2856
2857 @itemize @bullet
2858 @item
2859 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2860 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2861 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2862 @item
2863 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2864 @item
2865 One or more decimal digits.
2866 @end itemize
2867
2868 @end itemize
2869
2870 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2871 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2872
2873 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
2874 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2875 @command{@value{AS}}.
2876
2877 @ifclear GENERIC
2878 @ifset I960
2879 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2880 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2881 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2882 @node Bit Fields
2883 @subsubsection Bit Fields
2884
2885 @cindex bit fields
2886 @cindex constants, bit field
2887 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2888 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2889 @example
2890 @var{mask}:@var{value}
2891 @end example
2892 @noindent
2893 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2894 @var{value}.
2895
2896 The resulting number is then packed
2897 @ifset GENERIC
2898 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
2899 (in host-dependent byte order)
2900 @end ifset
2901 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
2902 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
2903 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
2904 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
2905 least significant digits.@refill
2906
2907 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
2908 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
2909 @end ifset
2910 @end ifclear
2911
2912 @node Sections
2913 @chapter Sections and Relocation
2914 @cindex sections
2915 @cindex relocation
2916
2917 @menu
2918 * Secs Background:: Background
2919 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
2920 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
2921 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
2922 * bss:: bss Section
2923 @end menu
2924
2925 @node Secs Background
2926 @section Background
2927
2928 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
2929 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
2930 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
2931
2932 @cindex linker, and assembler
2933 @cindex assembler, and linker
2934 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
2935 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
2936 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
2937 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
2938 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
2939 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
2940 sections.
2941
2942 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
2943 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
2944 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
2945 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
2946 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
2947 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
2948 the proper run-time addresses.
2949 @ifset H8
2950 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
2951 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
2952 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
2953 @end ifset
2954
2955 @cindex standard assembler sections
2956 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
2957 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
2958 @dfn{bss} sections.
2959
2960 @ifset COFF-ELF
2961 @ifset GENERIC
2962 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
2963 @end ifset
2964 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
2965 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
2966 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
2967 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
2968 @end ifset
2969
2970 @ifset HPPA
2971 @ifset GENERIC
2972 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
2973 @end ifset
2974 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
2975 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
2976 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
2977 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
2978 assembler directives.
2979
2980 @ifset SOM
2981 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
2982 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
2983 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
2984 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
2985 @end ifset
2986 @end ifset
2987
2988 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
2989 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
2990
2991 @ifset HPPA
2992 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
2993 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
2994 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
2995 @end ifset
2996
2997 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
2998 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
2999 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3000 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3001 file is mentioned:
3002 @itemize @bullet
3003 @item
3004 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3005 an address?
3006 @item
3007 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3008 @item
3009 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3010 @display
3011 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3012 @end display
3013 @item
3014 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3015 @end itemize
3016
3017 @cindex addresses, format of
3018 @cindex section-relative addressing
3019 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3020 @display
3021 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3022 @end display
3023 @noindent
3024 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3025 nature.
3026 @ifset SOM
3027 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3028 symbol-relative instead.)
3029 @end ifset
3030
3031 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3032 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3033
3034 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3035 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3036 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3037 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3038 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3039 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3040 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3041 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3042 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3043
3044 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3045 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3046 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3047 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3048 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3049 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3050 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3051
3052 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3053 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3054 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3055 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3056 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3057 data and bss sections.
3058
3059 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3060 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3061
3062 @node Ld Sections
3063 @section Linker Sections
3064 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3065
3066 @table @strong
3067
3068 @ifset COFF-ELF
3069 @cindex named sections
3070 @cindex sections, named
3071 @item named sections
3072 @end ifset
3073 @ifset aout-bout
3074 @cindex text section
3075 @cindex data section
3076 @itemx text section
3077 @itemx data section
3078 @end ifset
3079 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3080 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3081 true of another.
3082 @c @ifset aout-bout
3083 When the program is running, however, it is
3084 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3085 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3086 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3087 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3088 in the data section.
3089 @c @end ifset
3090
3091 @cindex bss section
3092 @item bss section
3093 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3094 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3095 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3096 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3097 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3098 those explicit zeros from object files.
3099
3100 @cindex absolute section
3101 @item absolute section
3102 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3103 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3104 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3105 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3106
3107 @cindex undefined section
3108 @item undefined section
3109 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3110 the preceding sections.
3111 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3112 @end table
3113
3114 @cindex relocation example
3115 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3116 @ifset COFF-ELF
3117 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3118 @end ifset
3119 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3120
3121 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3122 @ifnottex
3123 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3124 @smallexample
3125 +-----+----+--+
3126 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3127 +-----+----+--+
3128
3129 text data bss
3130 seg. seg. seg.
3131
3132 +---+---+---+
3133 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3134 +---+---+---+
3135
3136 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3137 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3138 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3139
3140 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3141 @end smallexample
3142 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3143 @end ifnottex
3144 @need 5000
3145 @tex
3146 \bigskip
3147 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3148 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3149 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3150
3151 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3152 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3153 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3154
3155 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3156 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3157 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3158 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3159 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3160
3161 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3162 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3163
3164 @end tex
3165 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3166
3167 @node As Sections
3168 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3169
3170 @cindex internal assembler sections
3171 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3172 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3173 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3174 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3175 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3176 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3177 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3178 section-relative address.
3179
3180 @table @b
3181 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3182 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3183 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3184 bug in the assembler.
3185
3186 @cindex expr (internal section)
3187 @item expr section
3188 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3189 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3190 it in the expr section.
3191 @c FIXME item debug
3192 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3193 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3194 @c FIXME item register
3195 @end table
3196
3197 @node Sub-Sections
3198 @section Sub-Sections
3199
3200 @cindex numbered subsections
3201 @cindex grouping data
3202 @ifset aout-bout
3203 Assembled bytes
3204 @ifset COFF-ELF
3205 conventionally
3206 @end ifset
3207 fall into two sections: text and data.
3208 @end ifset
3209 You may have separate groups of
3210 @ifset GENERIC
3211 data in named sections
3212 @end ifset
3213 @ifclear GENERIC
3214 @ifclear aout-bout
3215 data in named sections
3216 @end ifclear
3217 @ifset aout-bout
3218 text or data
3219 @end ifset
3220 @end ifclear
3221 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3222 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3223 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3224 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3225 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3226 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3227 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3228 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3229 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3230 constants being output.
3231
3232 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3233 goes in subsection number zero.
3234
3235 @ifset GENERIC
3236 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3237 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3238 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3239 @end ifset
3240 @ifclear GENERIC
3241 @ifset H8
3242 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3243 boundary (two bytes).
3244 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3245 @end ifset
3246 @ifset I960
3247 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3248 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3249 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3250 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3251 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3252 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3253 @end ifset
3254 @end ifclear
3255
3256 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3257 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3258 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3259 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3260 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3261 data subsections as a data section.
3262
3263 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3264 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3265 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3266 @ifset COFF
3267 @ifset GENERIC
3268 When generating COFF output, you
3269 @end ifset
3270 @ifclear GENERIC
3271 You
3272 @end ifclear
3273 can also use an extra subsection
3274 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3275 @var{expression}}.
3276 @end ifset
3277 @ifset ELF
3278 @ifset GENERIC
3279 When generating ELF output, you
3280 @end ifset
3281 @ifclear GENERIC
3282 You
3283 @end ifclear
3284 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3285 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3286 @end ifset
3287 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3288 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3289 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3290 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3291 @smallexample
3292 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3293 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3294 .text 1
3295 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3296 .data 0
3297 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3298 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3299 .text 0
3300 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3301 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3302 @end smallexample
3303
3304 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3305 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3306 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3307 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3308 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3309 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3310 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3311
3312 @node bss
3313 @section bss Section
3314
3315 @cindex bss section
3316 @cindex common variable storage
3317 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3318 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3319 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3320 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3321 section are zeroed bytes.
3322
3323 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3324 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3325
3326 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3327 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3328
3329 @ifset GENERIC
3330 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3331 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3332 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3333 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3334 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3335 @end ifset
3336
3337 @node Symbols
3338 @chapter Symbols
3339
3340 @cindex symbols
3341 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3342 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3343 to debug.
3344
3345 @quotation
3346 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3347 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3348 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3349 @end quotation
3350
3351 @menu
3352 * Labels:: Labels
3353 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3354 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3355 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3356 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3357 @end menu
3358
3359 @node Labels
3360 @section Labels
3361
3362 @cindex labels
3363 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3364 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3365 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3366 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3367 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3368 definitions.
3369
3370 @ifset HPPA
3371 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3372 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3373 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3374 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3375 @end ifset
3376
3377 @node Setting Symbols
3378 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3379
3380 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3381 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3382 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3383 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3384 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3385 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3386 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3387 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3388
3389 @ifset Blackfin
3390 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3391 @end ifset
3392
3393 @node Symbol Names
3394 @section Symbol Names
3395
3396 @cindex symbol names
3397 @cindex names, symbol
3398 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3399 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3400 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3401 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3402 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3403 particular target machine), and underscores.
3404 @end ifclear
3405 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3406 @ifset H8
3407 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3408 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3409 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3410 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3411 @end ifset
3412 @end ifset
3413
3414 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3415 than @code{Foo}.
3416
3417 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3418 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3419 in a program.
3420
3421 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3422
3423 @cindex local symbol names
3424 @cindex symbol names, local
3425 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3426 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3427 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3428 set of local label prefixes.
3429 @ifset HPPA
3430 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3431 @end ifset
3432
3433 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3434 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3435 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3436 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3437
3438 @subheading Local Labels
3439
3440 @cindex local labels
3441 @cindex temporary symbol names
3442 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3443 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3444 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3445 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3446 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3447 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3448 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3449 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3450 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3451 for ``forwards''.
3452
3453 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3454 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3455 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3456 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3457 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3458 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3459 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3460
3461 Here is an example:
3462
3463 @smallexample
3464 1: branch 1f
3465 2: branch 1b
3466 1: branch 2f
3467 2: branch 1b
3468 @end smallexample
3469
3470 Which is the equivalent of:
3471
3472 @smallexample
3473 label_1: branch label_3
3474 label_2: branch label_1
3475 label_3: branch label_4
3476 label_4: branch label_3
3477 @end smallexample
3478
3479 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3480 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3481 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3482 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3483 these parts:
3484
3485 @table @code
3486 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3487 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3488 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3489 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3490 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3491 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3492 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3493 you may use them in debugging.
3494
3495 @item @var{number}
3496 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3497 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3498
3499 @item @kbd{C-B}
3500 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3501 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3502
3503 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3504 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3505 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3506 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3507 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3508 @end table
3509
3510 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3511 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3512
3513 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3514 @cindex dollar local symbols
3515
3516 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3517 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3518 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3519 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3520 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3521 the same local label.
3522
3523 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3524 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3525 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3526
3527 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3528 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3529 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3530 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3531
3532 @node Dot
3533 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3534
3535 @cindex dot (symbol)
3536 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3537 @cindex current address
3538 @cindex location counter
3539 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3540 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3541 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3542 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3543 directive.
3544 @ifclear no-space-dir
3545 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3546 @samp{.space 4}.
3547 @end ifclear
3548
3549 @node Symbol Attributes
3550 @section Symbol Attributes
3551
3552 @cindex symbol attributes
3553 @cindex attributes, symbol
3554 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3555 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3556 attributes.
3557 @ifset INTERNALS
3558 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3559 @end ifset
3560
3561 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3562 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3563 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3564 would want.
3565
3566 @menu
3567 * Symbol Value:: Value
3568 * Symbol Type:: Type
3569 @ifset aout-bout
3570 @ifset GENERIC
3571 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3572 @end ifset
3573 @ifclear GENERIC
3574 @ifclear BOUT
3575 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3576 @end ifclear
3577 @ifset BOUT
3578 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3579 @end ifset
3580 @end ifclear
3581 @end ifset
3582 @ifset COFF
3583 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3584 @end ifset
3585 @ifset SOM
3586 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3587 @end ifset
3588 @end menu
3589
3590 @node Symbol Value
3591 @subsection Value
3592
3593 @cindex value of a symbol
3594 @cindex symbol value
3595 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3596 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3597 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3598 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3599 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3600 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3601 called absolute.
3602
3603 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3604 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3605 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3606 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3607 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3608 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3609 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3610 allocated storage.
3611
3612 @node Symbol Type
3613 @subsection Type
3614
3615 @cindex type of a symbol
3616 @cindex symbol type
3617 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3618 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3619 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3620 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3621
3622 @ifset aout-bout
3623 @ifclear GENERIC
3624 @ifset BOUT
3625 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3626 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3627 @need 1000
3628 @node a.out Symbols
3629 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3630
3631 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3632 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3633 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3634 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3635 @code{b.out}.
3636
3637 @end ifset
3638 @ifclear BOUT
3639 @node a.out Symbols
3640 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3641
3642 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3643 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3644
3645 @end ifclear
3646 @end ifclear
3647 @ifset GENERIC
3648 @node a.out Symbols
3649 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3650
3651 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3652 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3653
3654 @end ifset
3655 @menu
3656 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3657 * Symbol Other:: Other
3658 @end menu
3659
3660 @node Symbol Desc
3661 @subsubsection Descriptor
3662
3663 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3664 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3665 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3666 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3667 @command{@value{AS}}.
3668
3669 @node Symbol Other
3670 @subsubsection Other
3671
3672 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3673 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3674 @end ifset
3675
3676 @ifset COFF
3677 @node COFF Symbols
3678 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3679
3680 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3681 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3682
3683 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3684 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3685 @code{.endef} directives.
3686
3687 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3688
3689 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3690 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3691 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3692
3693 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3694
3695 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3696 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3697 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3698 table information for COFF.
3699 @end ifset
3700
3701 @ifset SOM
3702 @node SOM Symbols
3703 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3704
3705 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3706 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3707
3708 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3709 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3710
3711 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3712 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3713 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3714 @end ifset
3715
3716 @node Expressions
3717 @chapter Expressions
3718
3719 @cindex expressions
3720 @cindex addresses
3721 @cindex numeric values
3722 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3723 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3724
3725 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3726 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3727 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3728 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3729 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3730 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3731
3732 @menu
3733 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3734 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3735 @end menu
3736
3737 @node Empty Exprs
3738 @section Empty Expressions
3739
3740 @cindex empty expressions
3741 @cindex expressions, empty
3742 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3743 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3744 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3745 is compatible with other assemblers.
3746
3747 @node Integer Exprs
3748 @section Integer Expressions
3749
3750 @cindex integer expressions
3751 @cindex expressions, integer
3752 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3753 by @emph{operators}.
3754
3755 @menu
3756 * Arguments:: Arguments
3757 * Operators:: Operators
3758 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3759 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3760 @end menu
3761
3762 @node Arguments
3763 @subsection Arguments
3764
3765 @cindex expression arguments
3766 @cindex arguments in expressions
3767 @cindex operands in expressions
3768 @cindex arithmetic operands
3769 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3770 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3771 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3772 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3773 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3774 instruction operands.
3775
3776 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3777 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3778 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3779 integer.
3780
3781 Numbers are usually integers.
3782
3783 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3784 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3785 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3786 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3787 assemblers.
3788
3789 @cindex subexpressions
3790 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3791 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3792 operator followed by an argument.
3793
3794 @node Operators
3795 @subsection Operators
3796
3797 @cindex operators, in expressions
3798 @cindex arithmetic functions
3799 @cindex functions, in expressions
3800 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3801 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3802 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3803 whitespace.
3804
3805 @node Prefix Ops
3806 @subsection Prefix Operator
3807
3808 @cindex prefix operators
3809 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3810 one argument, which must be absolute.
3811
3812 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3813 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3814 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3815 @tex
3816 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3817 @end tex
3818
3819 @table @code
3820 @item -
3821 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3822 @item ~
3823 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
3824 @end table
3825
3826 @tex
3827 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3828 @end tex
3829
3830 @node Infix Ops
3831 @subsection Infix Operators
3832
3833 @cindex infix operators
3834 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
3835 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
3836 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3837 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3838 absolute, and the result is absolute.
3839
3840 @enumerate
3841 @cindex operator precedence
3842 @cindex precedence of operators
3843
3844 @item
3845 Highest Precedence
3846
3847 @table @code
3848 @item *
3849 @dfn{Multiplication}.
3850
3851 @item /
3852 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3853
3854 @item %
3855 @dfn{Remainder}.
3856
3857 @item <<
3858 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3859
3860 @item >>
3861 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3862 @end table
3863
3864 @item
3865 Intermediate precedence
3866
3867 @table @code
3868 @item |
3869
3870 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3871
3872 @item &
3873 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
3874
3875 @item ^
3876 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3877
3878 @item !
3879 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3880 @end table
3881
3882 @item
3883 Low Precedence
3884
3885 @table @code
3886 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
3887 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
3888 @cindex arguments for addition
3889 @item +
3890 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
3891 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
3892 sections.
3893
3894 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
3895 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
3896 @cindex arguments for subtraction
3897 @item -
3898 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
3899 result has the section of the left argument.
3900 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
3901 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
3902 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
3903
3904 @cindex comparison expressions
3905 @cindex expressions, comparison
3906 @item ==
3907 @dfn{Is Equal To}
3908 @item <>
3909 @itemx !=
3910 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
3911 @item <
3912 @dfn{Is Less Than}
3913 @item >
3914 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
3915 @item >=
3916 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
3917 @item <=
3918 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
3919
3920 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
3921 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
3922 perform signed comparisons.
3923 @end table
3924
3925 @item Lowest Precedence
3926
3927 @table @code
3928 @item &&
3929 @dfn{Logical And}.
3930
3931 @item ||
3932 @dfn{Logical Or}.
3933
3934 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
3935 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
3936 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
3937 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
3938
3939 @end table
3940 @end enumerate
3941
3942 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
3943 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
3944
3945 @node Pseudo Ops
3946 @chapter Assembler Directives
3947
3948 @cindex directives, machine independent
3949 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
3950 @cindex machine independent directives
3951 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
3952 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
3953
3954 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
3955 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
3956 @ifset GENERIC
3957 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
3958 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
3959 @end ifset
3960 @ifclear GENERIC
3961 @ifset machine-directives
3962 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
3963 @end ifset
3964 @end ifclear
3965
3966 @menu
3967 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
3968 @ifset COFF
3969 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
3970 @end ifset
3971
3972 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3973 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
3974 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3975 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3976 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3977 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
3978 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
3979 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
3980 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
3981 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
3982 @ifset COFF
3983 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
3984 @end ifset
3985 @ifset aout-bout
3986 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
3987 @end ifset
3988 @ifset COFF
3989 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
3990 @end ifset
3991
3992 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
3993 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
3994 * Else:: @code{.else}
3995 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
3996 * End:: @code{.end}
3997 @ifset COFF
3998 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
3999 @end ifset
4000
4001 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4002 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4003 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4004 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4005 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4006 * Err:: @code{.err}
4007 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4008 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4009 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4010 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4011 * File:: @code{.file}
4012 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4013 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4014 * Func:: @code{.func}
4015 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4016 @ifset ELF
4017 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4018 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4019 @end ifset
4020
4021 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4022 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4023 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4024 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4025 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4026 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4027 @ifset ELF
4028 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4029 @end ifset
4030
4031 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4032 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4033 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4034 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4035 @ifclear no-line-dir
4036 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4037 @end ifclear
4038
4039 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4040 * List:: @code{.list}
4041 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4042 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4043 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4044 @ifset ELF
4045 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4046 @end ifset
4047
4048 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4049 @ignore
4050 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4051 @end ignore
4052
4053 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4054 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4055 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4056 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4057 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4058 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4059 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4060 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4061 @ifset ELF
4062 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4063 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4064 @end ifset
4065
4066 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4067 @ifset ELF
4068 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4069 @end ifset
4070
4071 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4072 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4073 @ifset ELF
4074 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4075 @end ifset
4076
4077 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4078 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4079 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4080 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4081 @ifset COFF
4082 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4083 @end ifset
4084 @ifset COFF-ELF
4085 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4086 @end ifset
4087
4088 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4089 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4090 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4091 @ifset COFF-ELF
4092 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4093 @end ifset
4094 @ifclear no-space-dir
4095 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4096 @end ifclear
4097
4098 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4099 @ifclear no-space-dir
4100 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4101 @end ifclear
4102 @ifset have-stabs
4103 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4104 @end ifset
4105
4106 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4107 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4108 @ifset ELF
4109 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4110 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4111 @end ifset
4112
4113 @ifset COFF
4114 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4115 @end ifset
4116
4117 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4118 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4119 @ifset COFF-ELF
4120 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4121 @end ifset
4122
4123 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4124 @ifset COFF
4125 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4126 @end ifset
4127
4128 @ifset ELF
4129 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4130 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4131 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4132 @end ifset
4133
4134 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4135 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4136 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4137 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4138 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4139 @end menu
4140
4141 @node Abort
4142 @section @code{.abort}
4143
4144 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4145 @cindex stopping the assembly
4146 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4147 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4148 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4149 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4150 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4151
4152 @ifset COFF
4153 @node ABORT (COFF)
4154 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4155
4156 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4157 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4158 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4159
4160 @ifset BOUT
4161 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4162 but ignores it.
4163 @end ifset
4164 @end ifset
4165
4166 @node Align
4167 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4168
4169 @cindex padding the location counter
4170 @cindex @code{align} directive
4171 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4172 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4173 required, as described below.
4174
4175 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4176 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4177 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4178 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4179 with no-op instructions.
4180
4181 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4182 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4183 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4184 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4185 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4186 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4187 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4188
4189 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4190 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4191 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4192 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4193 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4194 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4195 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4196
4197 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4198 strongarm, it is the
4199 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4200 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4201 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4202 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4203
4204 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4205 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4206 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4207 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4208 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4209
4210 @node Altmacro
4211 @section @code{.altmacro}
4212 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4213
4214 @ftable @code
4215 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4216 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4217 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4218 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4219 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4220 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4221 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4222
4223 @item String delimiters
4224 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4225 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4226
4227 @table @code
4228 @item '@var{string}'
4229 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4230
4231 @item <@var{string}>
4232 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4233 @end table
4234
4235 @item single-character string escape
4236 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4237 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4238 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4239 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4240
4241 @item Expression results as strings
4242 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4243 and use the result as a string.
4244 @end ftable
4245
4246 @node Ascii
4247 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4248
4249 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4250 @cindex string literals
4251 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4252 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4253 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4254
4255 @node Asciz
4256 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4257
4258 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4259 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4260 @cindex null-terminated strings
4261 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4262 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4263
4264 @node Balign
4265 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4266
4267 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4268 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4269 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4270 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4271 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4272 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4273 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4274
4275 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4276 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4277 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4278 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4279 with no-op instructions.
4280
4281 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4282 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4283 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4284 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4285 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4286 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4287 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4288
4289 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4290 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4291 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4292 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4293 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4294 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4295 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4296 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4297 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4298 undefined.
4299
4300 @node Bundle directives
4301 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4302 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4303 @cindex bundle
4304 @cindex instruction bundle
4305 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4306 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4307 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4308 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4309 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4310 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4311 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4312
4313 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4314 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4315 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4316 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4317 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4318 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4319 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4320 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4321 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4322 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4323 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4324
4325 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4326 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4327 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4328 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4329 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4330 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4331 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4332 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4333 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4334
4335 @cindex bundle-locked
4336 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4337 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4338 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4339 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4340 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4341 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4342 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4343 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4344 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4345 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4346 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4347 bundle size.
4348
4349 Bundle-locked sequences do not nest. It's an error if two
4350 @code{.bundle_lock} directives appear without an intervening
4351 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive.
4352
4353 @node Byte
4354 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4355
4356 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4357 @cindex integers, one byte
4358 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4359 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4360
4361 @node CFI directives
4362 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4363 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4364 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4365 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4366 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4367 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4368 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4369 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4370
4371 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4372 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4373 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4374 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4375 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4376 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4377
4378 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4379 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4380
4381 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4382 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4383 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4384 unwind entry previously opened by
4385 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4386
4387 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4388 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4389 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4390 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4391 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4392 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4393 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4394 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4395 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4396 no personality routine.
4397
4398 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4399 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4400 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4401 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4402 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4403 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4404 no LSDA.
4405
4406 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4407 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4408 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4409
4410 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4411 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4412 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4413 remains the same.
4414
4415 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4416 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4417 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4418 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4419 CFA address.
4420
4421 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4422 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4423 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4424
4425 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4426 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4427 CFA.
4428
4429 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4430 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4431 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4432 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4433 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4434 code it's annotating.
4435
4436 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4437 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4438
4439 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4440 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4441 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4442 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4443
4444 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4445 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4446
4447 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4448 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4449 i.e. no restoration needed.
4450
4451 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4452 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4453 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4454 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4455 the previous saved state.
4456
4457 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4458 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4459 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4460
4461 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4462 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4463
4464 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4465 SPARC register window has been saved.
4466
4467 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4468 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4469 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4470 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4471
4472 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4473 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4474 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4475 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4476
4477 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4478 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4479 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4480 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4481 or another register.
4482
4483 @node Comm
4484 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4485
4486 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4487 @cindex symbol, common
4488 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4489 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4490 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4491 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4492 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4493 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4494 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4495 using the largest size.
4496
4497 @ifset COFF-ELF
4498 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4499 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4500 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4501 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4502 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4503 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4504 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4505 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4506 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4507 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4508 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4509 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4510 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4511 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4512 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4513 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4514 @end ifset
4515
4516 @ifset HPPA
4517 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4518 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4519 @end ifset
4520
4521 @node Data
4522 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4523
4524 @cindex @code{data} directive
4525 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4526 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4527 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4528 to zero.
4529
4530 @ifset COFF
4531 @node Def
4532 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4533
4534 @cindex @code{def} directive
4535 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4536 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4537 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4538 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4539 @ifset BOUT
4540
4541 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4542 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4543 but ignored.
4544 @end ifset
4545 @end ifset
4546
4547 @ifset aout-bout
4548 @node Desc
4549 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4550
4551 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4552 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4553 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4554 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4555 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4556
4557 @ifset COFF
4558 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4559 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4560 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4561 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4562 @end ifset
4563 @end ifset
4564
4565 @ifset COFF
4566 @node Dim
4567 @section @code{.dim}
4568
4569 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4570 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4571 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4572 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4573 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4574 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4575 @ifset BOUT
4576
4577 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4578 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4579 ignores it.
4580 @end ifset
4581 @end ifset
4582
4583 @node Double
4584 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4585
4586 @cindex @code{double} directive
4587 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4588 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4589 assembles floating point numbers.
4590 @ifset GENERIC
4591 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4592 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4593 @end ifset
4594 @ifclear GENERIC
4595 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4596 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4597 in @sc{ieee} format.
4598 @end ifset
4599 @end ifclear
4600
4601 @node Eject
4602 @section @code{.eject}
4603
4604 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4605 @cindex new page, in listings
4606 @cindex page, in listings
4607 @cindex listing control: new page
4608 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4609
4610 @node Else
4611 @section @code{.else}
4612
4613 @cindex @code{else} directive
4614 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4615 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4616 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4617 was false.
4618
4619 @node Elseif
4620 @section @code{.elseif}
4621
4622 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4623 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4624 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4625 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4626
4627 @node End
4628 @section @code{.end}
4629
4630 @cindex @code{end} directive
4631 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4632 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4633
4634 @ifset COFF
4635 @node Endef
4636 @section @code{.endef}
4637
4638 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4639 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4640 @code{.def}.
4641 @ifset BOUT
4642
4643 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4644 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4645 directive but ignores it.
4646 @end ifset
4647 @end ifset
4648
4649 @node Endfunc
4650 @section @code{.endfunc}
4651 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4652 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4653
4654 @node Endif
4655 @section @code{.endif}
4656
4657 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4658 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4659 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4660 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4661
4662 @node Equ
4663 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4664
4665 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4666 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4667 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4668 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4669 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4670
4671 @ifset HPPA
4672 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4673 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4674 @end ifset
4675
4676 @ifset Z80
4677 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4678 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4679 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4680 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4681 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4682 @end ifset
4683
4684 @node Equiv
4685 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4686 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4687 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4688 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4689 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4690 undefined.
4691
4692 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4693 @smallexample
4694 .ifdef SYM
4695 .err
4696 .endif
4697 .equ SYM,VAL
4698 @end smallexample
4699 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4700
4701 @node Eqv
4702 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4703 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4704 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4705 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4706 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4707 value is taken.
4708
4709 @node Err
4710 @section @code{.err}
4711 @cindex @code{err} directive
4712 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4713 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4714 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4715
4716 @node Error
4717 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4718 @cindex error directive
4719
4720 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4721 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4722 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4723 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4724
4725 @smallexample
4726 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4727 @end smallexample
4728
4729 @node Exitm
4730 @section @code{.exitm}
4731 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4732
4733 @node Extern
4734 @section @code{.extern}
4735
4736 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4737 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4738 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4739 all undefined symbols as external.
4740
4741 @node Fail
4742 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4743
4744 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4745 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4746 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4747 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4748 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4749 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4750
4751 @node File
4752 @section @code{.file}
4753 @cindex @code{file} directive
4754
4755 @ifclear no-file-dir
4756 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4757 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4758 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4759
4760 @subheading Default Version
4761
4762 @cindex logical file name
4763 @cindex file name, logical
4764 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4765 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4766
4767 @smallexample
4768 .file @var{string}
4769 @end smallexample
4770
4771 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4772 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4773 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4774 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4775 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4776
4777 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4778 @end ifclear
4779
4780 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4781 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4782
4783 @smallexample
4784 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4785 @end smallexample
4786
4787 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4788 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4789 literal.
4790
4791 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4792 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4793 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4794 entries will have.
4795
4796 @node Fill
4797 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4798
4799 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4800 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4801 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4802 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4803 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4804 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4805 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4806 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4807 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4808 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4809 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4810 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4811 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4812 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4813
4814 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4815 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4816 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4817 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4818
4819 @node Float
4820 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4821
4822 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
4823 @cindex @code{float} directive
4824 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4825 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4826 @ifset GENERIC
4827 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4828 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4829 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4830 @end ifset
4831 @ifclear GENERIC
4832 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4833 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4834 in @sc{ieee} format.
4835 @end ifset
4836 @end ifclear
4837
4838 @node Func
4839 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4840 @cindex @code{func} directive
4841 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4842 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4843 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4844 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4845 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4846 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4847 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4848 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4849
4850 @node Global
4851 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4852
4853 @cindex @code{global} directive
4854 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4855 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
4856 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4857 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
4858 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4859 from another file linked into the same program.
4860
4861 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4862 compatibility with other assemblers.
4863
4864 @ifset HPPA
4865 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4866 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4867 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4868 @end ifset
4869
4870 @ifset ELF
4871 @node Gnu_attribute
4872 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4873 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
4874
4875 @node Hidden
4876 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4877
4878 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
4879 @cindex visibility
4880 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
4881 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4882 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4883
4884 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4885 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
4886 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
4887 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
4888 @end ifset
4889
4890 @node hword
4891 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4892
4893 @cindex @code{hword} directive
4894 @cindex integers, 16-bit
4895 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
4896 @cindex sixteen bit integers
4897 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
4898 a 16 bit number for each.
4899
4900 @ifset GENERIC
4901 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
4902 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
4903 @end ifset
4904 @ifclear GENERIC
4905 @ifset W32
4906 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
4907 @end ifset
4908 @ifset W16
4909 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
4910 @end ifset
4911 @end ifclear
4912
4913 @node Ident
4914 @section @code{.ident}
4915
4916 @cindex @code{ident} directive
4917
4918 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
4919 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
4920 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
4921 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
4922 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
4923 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
4924 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
4925
4926 @node If
4927 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4928
4929 @cindex conditional assembly
4930 @cindex @code{if} directive
4931 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
4932 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
4933 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
4934 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
4935 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
4936 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
4937 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
4938 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
4939
4940 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
4941 @table @code
4942 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
4943 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
4944 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4945 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
4946 is considered to be undefined.
4947
4948 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
4949 @item .ifb @var{text}
4950 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
4951
4952 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
4953 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
4954 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
4955 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
4956 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
4957 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
4958 string comparison is case sensitive.
4959
4960 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
4961 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
4962 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
4963
4964 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
4965 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
4966 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
4967
4968 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
4969 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
4970 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
4971 equal to zero.
4972
4973 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
4974 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
4975 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
4976
4977 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
4978 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
4979 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
4980 to zero.
4981
4982 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
4983 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
4984 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
4985
4986 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
4987 @item .ifnb @var{text}
4988 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4989 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
4990
4991 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
4992 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
4993 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4994 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4995
4996 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
4997 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
4998 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
4999 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5000 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5001 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5002 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5003
5004 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5005 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5006 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5007 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5008
5009 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5010 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5011 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5012 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5013 @end table
5014
5015 @node Incbin
5016 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5017
5018 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5019 @cindex binary files, including
5020 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5021 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5022 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5023 around @var{file}.
5024
5025 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5026 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5027 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5028 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5029 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5030
5031 @node Include
5032 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5033
5034 @cindex @code{include} directive
5035 @cindex supporting files, including
5036 @cindex files, including
5037 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5038 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5039 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5040 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5041 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5042 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5043 around @var{file}.
5044
5045 @node Int
5046 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5047
5048 @cindex @code{int} directive
5049 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5050 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5051 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5052 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5053 of target the assembly is for.
5054
5055 @ifclear GENERIC
5056 @ifset H8
5057 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5058 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5059 32-bit integers.
5060 @end ifset
5061 @end ifclear
5062
5063 @ifset ELF
5064 @node Internal
5065 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5066
5067 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5068 @cindex visibility
5069 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5070 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5071 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5072
5073 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5074 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5075 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5076 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5077 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5078 @end ifset
5079
5080 @node Irp
5081 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5082
5083 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5084 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5085 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5086 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5087 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5088 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5089 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5090 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5091
5092 For example, assembling
5093
5094 @example
5095 .irp param,1,2,3
5096 move d\param,sp@@-
5097 .endr
5098 @end example
5099
5100 is equivalent to assembling
5101
5102 @example
5103 move d1,sp@@-
5104 move d2,sp@@-
5105 move d3,sp@@-
5106 @end example
5107
5108 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5109
5110 @node Irpc
5111 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5112
5113 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5114 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5115 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5116 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5117 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5118 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5119 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5120 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5121
5122 For example, assembling
5123
5124 @example
5125 .irpc param,123
5126 move d\param,sp@@-
5127 .endr
5128 @end example
5129
5130 is equivalent to assembling
5131
5132 @example
5133 move d1,sp@@-
5134 move d2,sp@@-
5135 move d3,sp@@-
5136 @end example
5137
5138 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5139 at @xref{Macro}.
5140
5141 @node Lcomm
5142 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5143
5144 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5145 @cindex local common symbols
5146 @cindex symbols, local common
5147 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5148 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5149 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5150 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5151 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5152 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5153
5154 @ifset GENERIC
5155 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5156 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5157 @end ifset
5158
5159 @ifset HPPA
5160 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5161 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5162 @end ifset
5163
5164 @node Lflags
5165 @section @code{.lflags}
5166
5167 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5168 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5169 assemblers, but ignores it.
5170
5171 @ifclear no-line-dir
5172 @node Line
5173 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5174
5175 @cindex @code{line} directive
5176 @cindex logical line number
5177 @ifset aout-bout
5178 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5179 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5180 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5181 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5182 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5183 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5184 @end ifset
5185
5186 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5187 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5188 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5189 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5190 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5191
5192 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5193 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5194 debugging.
5195 @end ifclear
5196
5197 @node Linkonce
5198 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5199 @cindex COMDAT
5200 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5201 @cindex common sections
5202 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5203 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5204 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5205 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5206 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5207 unique.
5208
5209 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5210 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5211 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5212
5213 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5214 following strings. For example:
5215 @smallexample
5216 .linkonce same_size
5217 @end smallexample
5218 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5219
5220 @table @code
5221 @item discard
5222 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5223
5224 @item one_only
5225 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5226
5227 @item same_size
5228 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5229
5230 @item same_contents
5231 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5232 @end table
5233
5234 @node List
5235 @section @code{.list}
5236
5237 @cindex @code{list} directive
5238 @cindex listing control, turning on
5239 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5240 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5241 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5242 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5243 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5244
5245 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5246 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5247 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5248
5249 @node Ln
5250 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5251
5252 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5253 @ifclear no-line-dir
5254 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5255 @end ifclear
5256 @ifset no-line-dir
5257 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5258 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5259 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5260 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5261 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5262 @ifset BOUT
5263
5264 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5265 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5266 output format.
5267 @end ifset
5268 @end ifset
5269
5270 @node Loc
5271 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5272 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5273 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5274 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5275 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5276 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5277 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5278 the row is added.
5279
5280 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5281
5282 @table @code
5283 @item basic_block
5284 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5285 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5286
5287 @item prologue_end
5288 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5289 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5290
5291 @item epilogue_begin
5292 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5293 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5294
5295 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5296 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5297 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5298 either 0 or 1.
5299
5300 @item isa @var{value}
5301 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5302 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5303
5304 @item discriminator @var{value}
5305 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5306 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5307
5308 @end table
5309
5310 @node Loc_mark_labels
5311 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5312 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5313 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5314 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5315 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5316 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5317 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5318 this function respectively.
5319
5320 @ifset ELF
5321 @node Local
5322 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5323
5324 @cindex @code{local} directive
5325 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5326 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5327 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5328 they will be created.
5329
5330 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5331 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5332 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5333 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5334 @end ifset
5335
5336 @node Long
5337 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5338
5339 @cindex @code{long} directive
5340 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5341
5342 @ignore
5343 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5344 @c what it really ought to do
5345 @node Lsym
5346 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5347
5348 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5349 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5350 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5351 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5352 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5353 the same as the expression value:
5354 @smallexample
5355 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5356 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5357 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5358 @end smallexample
5359 @noindent
5360 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5361 @end ignore
5362
5363 @node Macro
5364 @section @code{.macro}
5365
5366 @cindex macros
5367 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5368 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5369 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5370
5371 @example
5372 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5373 .long \from
5374 .if \to-\from
5375 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5376 .endif
5377 .endm
5378 @end example
5379
5380 @noindent
5381 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5382
5383 @example
5384 .long 0
5385 .long 1
5386 .long 2
5387 .long 3
5388 .long 4
5389 .long 5
5390 @end example
5391
5392 @ftable @code
5393 @item .macro @var{macname}
5394 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5395 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5396 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5397 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5398 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5399 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5400 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5401 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5402 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5403 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5404 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5405 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5406
5407 @table @code
5408 @item .macro comm
5409 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5410 arguments.
5411
5412 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5413 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5414 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5415 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5416 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5417
5418 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5419 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5420 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5421 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5422 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5423 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5424 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5425 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5426
5427 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5428 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5429 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5430 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5431 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5432
5433 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5434 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5435 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5436
5437 @end table
5438
5439 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5440 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5441 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5442 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5443 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5444 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5445 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5446 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5447 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5448 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5449 this macro definition:
5450
5451 @example
5452 .macro label l
5453 \l:
5454 .endm
5455 @end example
5456
5457 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5458 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5459 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5460 identifier.
5461
5462 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5463 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5464 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5465 length specifier like this:
5466
5467 @example
5468 .macro opcode base length
5469 \base.\length
5470 .endm
5471 @end example
5472
5473 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5474 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5475 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5476
5477 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5478
5479 @table @code
5480 @item Insert white space
5481 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5482 solution. eg:
5483
5484 @example
5485 .macro label l
5486 \l :
5487 .endm
5488 @end example
5489
5490 @item Use @samp{\()}
5491 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5492 the following text. eg:
5493
5494 @example
5495 .macro opcode base length
5496 \base\().\length
5497 .endm
5498 @end example
5499
5500 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5501 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5502 used as a separator. eg:
5503
5504 @example
5505 .altmacro
5506 .macro label l
5507 l&:
5508 .endm
5509 @end example
5510 @end table
5511
5512 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5513 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5514 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5515
5516 @item .endm
5517 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5518 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5519
5520 @item .exitm
5521 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5522 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5523
5524 @cindex number of macros executed
5525 @cindex macros, count executed
5526 @item \@@
5527 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5528 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5529 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5530
5531 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5532 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5533 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5534 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5535 @end ftable
5536
5537 @node MRI
5538 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5539
5540 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5541 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5542 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5543 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5544 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5545 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5546
5547 @node Noaltmacro
5548 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5549 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5550
5551 @node Nolist
5552 @section @code{.nolist}
5553
5554 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5555 @cindex listing control, turning off
5556 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5557 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5558 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5559 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5560 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5561
5562 @node Octa
5563 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5564
5565 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5566 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5567 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5568 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5569 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5570 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5571
5572 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5573 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5574
5575 @node Offset
5576 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5577
5578 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5579 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5580 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5581 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5582 directive.
5583
5584 @node Org
5585 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5586
5587 @cindex @code{org} directive
5588 @cindex location counter, advancing
5589 @cindex advancing location counter
5590 @cindex current address, advancing
5591 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5592 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5593 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5594 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5595 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5596 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5597 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5598 is the same as the current subsection.
5599
5600 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5601 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5602 backwards.
5603
5604 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5605 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5606 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5607 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5608 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5609 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5610
5611 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5612 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5613 people's assemblers.
5614
5615 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5616 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5617 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5618 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5619
5620 @node P2align
5621 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5622
5623 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5624 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5625 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5626 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5627 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5628 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5629 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5630 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5631
5632 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5633 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5634 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5635 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5636 with no-op instructions.
5637
5638 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5639 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5640 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5641 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5642 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5643 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5644 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5645
5646 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5647 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5648 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5649 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5650 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5651 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5652 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5653 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5654 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5655 undefined.
5656
5657 @ifset ELF
5658 @node PopSection
5659 @section @code{.popsection}
5660
5661 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5662 @cindex Section Stack
5663 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5664 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5665 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5666 (@pxref{Previous}).
5667
5668 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5669 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5670 stack.
5671 @end ifset
5672
5673 @ifset ELF
5674 @node Previous
5675 @section @code{.previous}
5676
5677 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5678 @cindex Section Stack
5679 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5680 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5681 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5682 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5683
5684 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5685 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5686 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5687 subsections). For example:
5688
5689 @smallexample
5690 .section A
5691 .subsection 1
5692 .word 0x1234
5693 .subsection 2
5694 .word 0x5678
5695 .previous
5696 .word 0x9abc
5697 @end smallexample
5698
5699 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5700 section A. Whilst:
5701
5702 @smallexample
5703 .section A
5704 .subsection 1
5705 # Now in section A subsection 1
5706 .word 0x1234
5707 .section B
5708 .subsection 0
5709 # Now in section B subsection 0
5710 .word 0x5678
5711 .subsection 1
5712 # Now in section B subsection 1
5713 .word 0x9abc
5714 .previous
5715 # Now in section B subsection 0
5716 .word 0xdef0
5717 @end smallexample
5718
5719 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5720 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5721
5722 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5723 the top section on the section stack.
5724 @end ifset
5725
5726 @node Print
5727 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5728
5729 @cindex @code{print} directive
5730 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5731 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5732
5733 @ifset ELF
5734 @node Protected
5735 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5736
5737 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5738 @cindex visibility
5739 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5740 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5741
5742 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5743 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5744 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5745 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5746 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5747 this.
5748 @end ifset
5749
5750 @node Psize
5751 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5752
5753 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5754 @cindex listing control: paper size
5755 @cindex paper size, for listings
5756 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5757 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5758
5759 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5760 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5761 default width is 200 columns.
5762
5763 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5764 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5765 @code{.eject}).
5766
5767 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5768 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5769
5770 @node Purgem
5771 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5772
5773 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5774 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5775 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5776
5777 @ifset ELF
5778 @node PushSection
5779 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5780
5781 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5782 @cindex Section Stack
5783 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5784 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5785 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5786 (@pxref{Previous}).
5787
5788 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5789 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5790 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5791 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5792 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5793 @end ifset
5794
5795 @node Quad
5796 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5797
5798 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5799 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5800 each bignum, it emits
5801 @ifclear bignum-16
5802 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5803 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5804 @cindex eight-byte integer
5805 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5806
5807 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5808 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5809 @end ifclear
5810 @ifset bignum-16
5811 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5812 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5813 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5814 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5815 @end ifset
5816
5817 @node Reloc
5818 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5819
5820 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
5821 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5822 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5823 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5824 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5825 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5826 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
5827 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5828 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5829 section.
5830
5831 @node Rept
5832 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5833
5834 @cindex @code{rept} directive
5835 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5836 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5837
5838 For example, assembling
5839
5840 @example
5841 .rept 3
5842 .long 0
5843 .endr
5844 @end example
5845
5846 is equivalent to assembling
5847
5848 @example
5849 .long 0
5850 .long 0
5851 .long 0
5852 @end example
5853
5854 @node Sbttl
5855 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5856
5857 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5858 @cindex subtitles for listings
5859 @cindex listing control: subtitle
5860 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5861 title line) when generating assembly listings.
5862
5863 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5864 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5865
5866 @ifset COFF
5867 @node Scl
5868 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5869
5870 @cindex @code{scl} directive
5871 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5872 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
5873 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
5874 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
5875 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5876 symbolic debugging information.
5877 @ifset BOUT
5878
5879 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5880 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5881 accepts this directive but ignores it.
5882 @end ifset
5883 @end ifset
5884
5885 @ifset COFF-ELF
5886 @node Section
5887 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
5888
5889 @cindex named section
5890 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
5891 named @var{name}.
5892
5893 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
5894 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
5895 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
5896
5897 @ifset COFF
5898 @ifset ELF
5899 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5900 @subheading COFF Version
5901 @end ifset
5902
5903 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
5904 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
5905 ways:
5906
5907 @smallexample
5908 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
5909 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
5910 @end smallexample
5911
5912 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
5913 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
5914 @table @code
5915 @item b
5916 bss section (uninitialized data)
5917 @item n
5918 section is not loaded
5919 @item w
5920 writable section
5921 @item d
5922 data section
5923 @item r
5924 read-only section
5925 @item x
5926 executable section
5927 @item s
5928 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
5929 @item a
5930 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
5931 @item y
5932 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
5933 @item 0-9
5934 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
5935 @end table
5936
5937 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
5938 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
5939 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
5940 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
5941 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
5942
5943 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
5944 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
5945 @end ifset
5946
5947 @ifset ELF
5948 @ifset COFF
5949 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5950 @subheading ELF Version
5951 @end ifset
5952
5953 @cindex Section Stack
5954 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5955 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
5956 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
5957 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
5958
5959 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
5960 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
5961
5962 @smallexample
5963 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
5964 @end smallexample
5965
5966 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
5967 combination of the following characters:
5968 @table @code
5969 @item a
5970 section is allocatable
5971 @item e
5972 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
5973 @item w
5974 section is writable
5975 @item x
5976 section is executable
5977 @item M
5978 section is mergeable
5979 @item S
5980 section contains zero terminated strings
5981 @item G
5982 section is a member of a section group
5983 @item T
5984 section is used for thread-local-storage
5985 @item ?
5986 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
5987 @end table
5988
5989 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
5990 @table @code
5991 @item @@progbits
5992 section contains data
5993 @item @@nobits
5994 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
5995 @item @@note
5996 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
5997 @item @@init_array
5998 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
5999 @item @@fini_array
6000 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6001 @item @@preinit_array
6002 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6003 @end table
6004
6005 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6006
6007 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6008 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6009 @code{%} character.
6010
6011 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6012 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6013
6014 @smallexample
6015 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6016 @end smallexample
6017
6018 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6019 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6020 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6021 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6022 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6023 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6024 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6025 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6026 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6027
6028 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6029 be present along with an additional field like this:
6030
6031 @smallexample
6032 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6033 @end smallexample
6034
6035 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6036 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6037 @table @code
6038 @item comdat
6039 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6040 @item .gnu.linkonce
6041 an alias for comdat
6042 @end table
6043
6044 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6045 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6046
6047 @smallexample
6048 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6049 @end smallexample
6050
6051 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6052 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6053 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6054 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6055 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6056 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6057
6058 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6059 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6060 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6061 executable. The section will contain data.
6062
6063 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6064 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6065
6066 @smallexample
6067 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6068 @end smallexample
6069
6070 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6071 separated flags:
6072 @table @code
6073 @item #alloc
6074 section is allocatable
6075 @item #write
6076 section is writable
6077 @item #execinstr
6078 section is executable
6079 @item #exclude
6080 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6081 @item #tls
6082 section is used for thread local storage
6083 @end table
6084
6085 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6086 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6087 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6088 work.
6089 @end ifset
6090 @end ifset
6091
6092 @node Set
6093 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6094
6095 @cindex @code{set} directive
6096 @cindex symbol value, setting
6097 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6098 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6099 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6100 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6101
6102 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6103
6104 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6105 file is the last value stored into it.
6106
6107 @ifset Z80
6108 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6109 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6110 @end ifset
6111
6112 @node Short
6113 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6114
6115 @cindex @code{short} directive
6116 @ifset GENERIC
6117 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6118 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6119
6120 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6121 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6122 @end ifset
6123 @ifclear GENERIC
6124 @ifset W16
6125 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6126 @end ifset
6127 @ifset W32
6128 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6129 a 16 bit number for each.
6130 @end ifset
6131 @end ifclear
6132
6133 @node Single
6134 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6135
6136 @cindex @code{single} directive
6137 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6138 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6139 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6140 @ifset GENERIC
6141 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6142 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6143 @end ifset
6144 @ifclear GENERIC
6145 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6146 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6147 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6148 @end ifset
6149 @end ifclear
6150
6151 @ifset COFF-ELF
6152 @node Size
6153 @section @code{.size}
6154
6155 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6156
6157 @ifset COFF
6158 @ifset ELF
6159 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6160 @subheading COFF Version
6161 @end ifset
6162
6163 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6164 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6165 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6166
6167 @smallexample
6168 .size @var{expression}
6169 @end smallexample
6170
6171 @ifset BOUT
6172 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6173 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6174 ignores it.
6175 @end ifset
6176 @end ifset
6177
6178 @ifset ELF
6179 @ifset COFF
6180 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6181 @subheading ELF Version
6182 @end ifset
6183
6184 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6185 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6186
6187 @smallexample
6188 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6189 @end smallexample
6190
6191 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6192 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6193 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6194 symbols.
6195 @end ifset
6196 @end ifset
6197
6198 @ifclear no-space-dir
6199 @node Skip
6200 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6201
6202 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6203 @cindex filling memory
6204 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6205 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6206 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6207 @samp{.space}.
6208 @end ifclear
6209
6210 @node Sleb128
6211 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6212
6213 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6214 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6215 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6216 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6217
6218 @ifclear no-space-dir
6219 @node Space
6220 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6221
6222 @cindex @code{space} directive
6223 @cindex filling memory
6224 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6225 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6226 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6227 as @samp{.skip}.
6228
6229 @ifset HPPA
6230 @quotation
6231 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6232 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6233 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6234 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6235 for a summary.
6236 @end quotation
6237 @end ifset
6238 @end ifclear
6239
6240 @ifset have-stabs
6241 @node Stab
6242 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6243
6244 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6245 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6246 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6247 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6248 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6249 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6250 Up to five fields are required:
6251
6252 @table @var
6253 @item string
6254 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6255 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6256 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6257 using this field.
6258
6259 @item type
6260 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6261 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6262 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6263
6264 @item other
6265 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6266 low 8 bits of this expression.
6267
6268 @item desc
6269 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6270 bits of this expression.
6271
6272 @item value
6273 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6274 @end table
6275
6276 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6277 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6278 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6279 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6280
6281 @table @code
6282 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6283 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6284
6285 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6286 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6287 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6288 strings.
6289
6290 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6291 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6292 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6293 assembled.
6294
6295 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6296 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6297 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6298
6299 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6300 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6301 All five fields are specified.
6302 @end table
6303 @end ifset
6304 @c end have-stabs
6305
6306 @node String
6307 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6308 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6309
6310 @cindex string, copying to object file
6311 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6312 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6313 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6314 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6315 @cindex @code{string} directive
6316 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6317 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6318 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6319 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6320
6321 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6322 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6323 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6324 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6325
6326 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6327 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6328 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6329 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6330
6331 Example:
6332 @smallexample
6333 .string32 "BYE"
6334 expands to:
6335 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6336 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6337 @end smallexample
6338
6339
6340 @node Struct
6341 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6342
6343 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6344 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6345 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6346 @smallexample
6347 .struct 0
6348 field1:
6349 .struct field1 + 4
6350 field2:
6351 .struct field2 + 4
6352 field3:
6353 @end smallexample
6354 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6355 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6356 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6357 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6358 before further assembly.
6359
6360 @ifset ELF
6361 @node SubSection
6362 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6363
6364 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6365 @cindex Section Stack
6366 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6367 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6368 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6369 (@pxref{Previous}).
6370
6371 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6372 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6373 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6374 @end ifset
6375
6376 @ifset ELF
6377 @node Symver
6378 @section @code{.symver}
6379 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6380 @cindex symbol versioning
6381 @cindex versions of symbols
6382 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6383 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6384 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6385 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6386 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6387 shared library.
6388
6389 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6390 @smallexample
6391 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6392 @end smallexample
6393 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6394 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6395 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6396 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6397 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6398 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6399 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6400 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6401 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6402 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6403 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6404 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6405 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6406 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6407
6408 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6409 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6410 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6411 symbol table.
6412
6413 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6414 @smallexample
6415 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6416 @end smallexample
6417 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6418 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6419 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6420 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6421
6422 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6423 @smallexample
6424 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6425 @end smallexample
6426 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6427 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6428 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6429 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6430 @end ifset
6431
6432 @ifset COFF
6433 @node Tag
6434 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6435
6436 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6437 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6438 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6439 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6440 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6441 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6442 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6443 @ifset BOUT
6444
6445 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6446 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6447 ignores it.
6448 @end ifset
6449 @end ifset
6450
6451 @node Text
6452 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6453
6454 @cindex @code{text} directive
6455 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6456 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6457 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6458 is used.
6459
6460 @node Title
6461 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6462
6463 @cindex @code{title} directive
6464 @cindex listing control: title line
6465 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6466 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6467
6468 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6469 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6470
6471 @ifset COFF-ELF
6472 @node Type
6473 @section @code{.type}
6474
6475 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6476
6477 @ifset COFF
6478 @ifset ELF
6479 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6480 @subheading COFF Version
6481 @end ifset
6482
6483 @cindex COFF symbol type
6484 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6485 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6486 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6487 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6488
6489 @smallexample
6490 .type @var{int}
6491 @end smallexample
6492
6493 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6494 entry.
6495
6496 @ifset BOUT
6497 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6498 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6499 directive but ignores it.
6500 @end ifset
6501 @end ifset
6502
6503 @ifset ELF
6504 @ifset COFF
6505 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6506 @subheading ELF Version
6507 @end ifset
6508
6509 @cindex ELF symbol type
6510 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6511 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6512 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6513
6514 @smallexample
6515 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6516 @end smallexample
6517
6518 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6519 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6520 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6521 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6522
6523 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6524 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6525 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6526 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6527 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6528 assemblers.
6529
6530 The syntaxes supported are:
6531
6532 @smallexample
6533 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6534 .type <name>,#<type>
6535 .type <name>,@@<type>
6536 .type <name>,%<type>
6537 .type <name>,"<type>"
6538 @end smallexample
6539
6540 The types supported are:
6541
6542 @table @gcctabopt
6543 @item STT_FUNC
6544 @itemx function
6545 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6546
6547 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6548 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6549 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6550 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6551
6552 @item STT_OBJECT
6553 @itemx object
6554 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6555
6556 @item STT_TLS
6557 @itemx tls_object
6558 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6559
6560 @item STT_COMMON
6561 @itemx common
6562 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6563
6564 @item STT_NOTYPE
6565 @itemx notype
6566 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6567
6568 @item gnu_unique_object
6569 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6570 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6571 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6572 systems).
6573
6574 @end table
6575
6576 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6577
6578 @end ifset
6579 @end ifset
6580
6581 @node Uleb128
6582 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6583
6584 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6585 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6586 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6587 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6588
6589 @ifset COFF
6590 @node Val
6591 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6592
6593 @cindex @code{val} directive
6594 @cindex COFF value attribute
6595 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6596 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6597 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6598 entry.
6599 @ifset BOUT
6600
6601 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6602 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6603 @end ifset
6604 @end ifset
6605
6606 @ifset ELF
6607 @node Version
6608 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6609
6610 @cindex @code{version} directive
6611 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6612 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6613 @end ifset
6614
6615 @ifset ELF
6616 @node VTableEntry
6617 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6618
6619 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6620 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6621 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6622
6623 @node VTableInherit
6624 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6625
6626 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6627 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6628 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6629 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6630 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6631 @end ifset
6632
6633 @node Warning
6634 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6635 @cindex warning directive
6636 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6637 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6638
6639 @node Weak
6640 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6641
6642 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6643 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6644 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6645
6646 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6647 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6648 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6649
6650 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6651 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6652 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6653
6654 @node Weakref
6655 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6656
6657 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6658 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6659 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6660 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6661 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6662 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6663
6664 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6665 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6666 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6667 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6668 had the references to the alias removed.
6669
6670 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6671 within the assembler.
6672
6673 @node Word
6674 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6675
6676 @cindex @code{word} directive
6677 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6678 separated by commas.
6679 @ifclear GENERIC
6680 @ifset W32
6681 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6682 @end ifset
6683 @ifset W16
6684 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6685 @end ifset
6686 @end ifclear
6687 @ifset GENERIC
6688
6689 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6690 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6691 @end ifset
6692
6693 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6694 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6695 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6696 @cindex difference tables altered
6697 @cindex altered difference tables
6698 @quotation
6699 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6700 @end quotation
6701
6702 @ifset GENERIC
6703 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6704 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6705 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6706 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6707
6708 @end ifset
6709 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6710 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6711 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6712 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6713 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6714 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6715 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6716 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6717 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6718 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6719 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6720 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6721 @code{sym2}.
6722
6723 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6724 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6725 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6726 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6727 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6728 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6729 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6730
6731 @ifset INTERNALS
6732 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6733 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6734 assembly language programmers.
6735 @end ifset
6736 @end ifset
6737 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6738
6739 @node Deprecated
6740 @section Deprecated Directives
6741
6742 @cindex deprecated directives
6743 @cindex obsolescent directives
6744 One day these directives won't work.
6745 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6746 @table @t
6747 @item .abort
6748 @item .line
6749 @end table
6750
6751 @ifset ELF
6752 @node Object Attributes
6753 @chapter Object Attributes
6754 @cindex object attributes
6755
6756 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6757 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6758 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6759 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6760 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6761 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6762 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6763 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6764 newer generation at run-time.
6765
6766 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6767 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6768 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6769 correctly.
6770
6771 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6772 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6773 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6774 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6775 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6776 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6777
6778 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6779 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6780
6781 @menu
6782 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6783 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6784 @end menu
6785
6786 @node GNU Object Attributes
6787 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6788
6789 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6790 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6791
6792 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6793 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6794 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6795 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6796 architecture-dependent ones.
6797
6798 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6799
6800 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6801
6802 @table @r
6803 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6804 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6805 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6806 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6807 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6808 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6809 @end table
6810
6811 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6812
6813 @table @r
6814 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6815 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6816
6817 @itemize @bullet
6818 @item
6819 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6820 @item
6821 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6822 FPU.
6823 @item
6824 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6825 @item
6826 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6827 @item
6828 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6829 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6830 purpose registers.
6831 @end itemize
6832 @end table
6833
6834 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
6835
6836 @table @r
6837 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6838 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6839
6840 @itemize @bullet
6841 @item
6842 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6843 @item
6844 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6845 @item
6846 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6847 @item
6848 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6849 @end itemize
6850
6851 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6852 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6853
6854 @itemize @bullet
6855 @item
6856 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
6857 @item
6858 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6859 @item
6860 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6861 @item
6862 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6863 @end itemize
6864 @end table
6865
6866 @node Defining New Object Attributes
6867 @section Defining New Object Attributes
6868
6869 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6870 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6871 mailing list.
6872
6873 @itemize @bullet
6874 @item
6875 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6876 @item
6877 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6878 @item
6879 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6880 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6881 @item
6882 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6883 @item
6884 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
6885 @item
6886 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
6887 @end itemize
6888
6889 @end ifset
6890
6891 @ifset GENERIC
6892 @node Machine Dependencies
6893 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6894
6895 @cindex machine dependencies
6896 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
6897 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
6898 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
6899 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
6900 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
6901 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
6902 optimization.
6903
6904 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
6905 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
6906 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
6907
6908 @menu
6909 @ifset ALPHA
6910 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
6911 @end ifset
6912 @ifset ARC
6913 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
6914 @end ifset
6915 @ifset ARM
6916 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
6917 @end ifset
6918 @ifset AVR
6919 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
6920 @end ifset
6921 @ifset Blackfin
6922 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
6923 @end ifset
6924 @ifset CR16
6925 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
6926 @end ifset
6927 @ifset CRIS
6928 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
6929 @end ifset
6930 @ifset D10V
6931 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
6932 @end ifset
6933 @ifset D30V
6934 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
6935 @end ifset
6936 @ifset EPIPHANY
6937 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
6938 @end ifset
6939 @ifset H8/300
6940 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6941 @end ifset
6942 @ifset HPPA
6943 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
6944 @end ifset
6945 @ifset I370
6946 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
6947 @end ifset
6948 @ifset I80386
6949 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
6950 @end ifset
6951 @ifset I860
6952 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
6953 @end ifset
6954 @ifset I960
6955 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
6956 @end ifset
6957 @ifset IA64
6958 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
6959 @end ifset
6960 @ifset IP2K
6961 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
6962 @end ifset
6963 @ifset LM32
6964 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
6965 @end ifset
6966 @ifset M32C
6967 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
6968 @end ifset
6969 @ifset M32R
6970 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
6971 @end ifset
6972 @ifset M680X0
6973 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
6974 @end ifset
6975 @ifset M68HC11
6976 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
6977 @end ifset
6978 @ifset MICROBLAZE
6979 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
6980 @end ifset
6981 @ifset MIPS
6982 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
6983 @end ifset
6984 @ifset MMIX
6985 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
6986 @end ifset
6987 @ifset MSP430
6988 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
6989 @end ifset
6990 @ifset NS32K
6991 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
6992 @end ifset
6993 @ifset SH
6994 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
6995 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
6996 @end ifset
6997 @ifset PDP11
6998 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
6999 @end ifset
7000 @ifset PJ
7001 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7002 @end ifset
7003 @ifset PPC
7004 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7005 @end ifset
7006 @ifset RL78
7007 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7008 @end ifset
7009 @ifset RX
7010 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7011 @end ifset
7012 @ifset S390
7013 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7014 @end ifset
7015 @ifset SCORE
7016 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7017 @end ifset
7018 @ifset SPARC
7019 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7020 @end ifset
7021 @ifset TIC54X
7022 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7023 @end ifset
7024 @ifset TIC6X
7025 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7026 @end ifset
7027 @ifset TILEGX
7028 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7029 @end ifset
7030 @ifset TILEPRO
7031 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7032 @end ifset
7033 @ifset V850
7034 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7035 @end ifset
7036 @ifset XGATE
7037 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7038 @end ifset
7039 @ifset XSTORMY16
7040 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7041 @end ifset
7042 @ifset XTENSA
7043 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7044 @end ifset
7045 @ifset Z80
7046 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7047 @end ifset
7048 @ifset Z8000
7049 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7050 @end ifset
7051 @ifset VAX
7052 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7053 @end ifset
7054 @end menu
7055
7056 @lowersections
7057 @end ifset
7058
7059 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7060 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7061 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7062 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7063 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7064 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7065 @c in both conditional blocks.
7066
7067 @ifset ALPHA
7068 @include c-alpha.texi
7069 @end ifset
7070
7071 @ifset ARC
7072 @include c-arc.texi
7073 @end ifset
7074
7075 @ifset ARM
7076 @include c-arm.texi
7077 @end ifset
7078
7079 @ifset AVR
7080 @include c-avr.texi
7081 @end ifset
7082
7083 @ifset Blackfin
7084 @include c-bfin.texi
7085 @end ifset
7086
7087 @ifset CR16
7088 @include c-cr16.texi
7089 @end ifset
7090
7091 @ifset CRIS
7092 @include c-cris.texi
7093 @end ifset
7094
7095 @ifset Renesas-all
7096 @ifclear GENERIC
7097 @node Machine Dependencies
7098 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7099
7100 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7101 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7102 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7103 family.
7104
7105 @menu
7106 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7107 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7108 @end menu
7109 @lowersections
7110 @end ifclear
7111 @end ifset
7112
7113 @ifset D10V
7114 @include c-d10v.texi
7115 @end ifset
7116
7117 @ifset D30V
7118 @include c-d30v.texi
7119 @end ifset
7120
7121 @ifset EPIPHANY
7122 @include c-epiphany.texi
7123 @end ifset
7124
7125 @ifset H8/300
7126 @include c-h8300.texi
7127 @end ifset
7128
7129 @ifset HPPA
7130 @include c-hppa.texi
7131 @end ifset
7132
7133 @ifset I370
7134 @include c-i370.texi
7135 @end ifset
7136
7137 @ifset I80386
7138 @include c-i386.texi
7139 @end ifset
7140
7141 @ifset I860
7142 @include c-i860.texi
7143 @end ifset
7144
7145 @ifset I960
7146 @include c-i960.texi
7147 @end ifset
7148
7149 @ifset IA64
7150 @include c-ia64.texi
7151 @end ifset
7152
7153 @ifset IP2K
7154 @include c-ip2k.texi
7155 @end ifset
7156
7157 @ifset LM32
7158 @include c-lm32.texi
7159 @end ifset
7160
7161 @ifset M32C
7162 @include c-m32c.texi
7163 @end ifset
7164
7165 @ifset M32R
7166 @include c-m32r.texi
7167 @end ifset
7168
7169 @ifset M680X0
7170 @include c-m68k.texi
7171 @end ifset
7172
7173 @ifset M68HC11
7174 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7175 @end ifset
7176
7177 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7178 @include c-microblaze.texi
7179 @end ifset
7180
7181 @ifset MIPS
7182 @include c-mips.texi
7183 @end ifset
7184
7185 @ifset MMIX
7186 @include c-mmix.texi
7187 @end ifset
7188
7189 @ifset MSP430
7190 @include c-msp430.texi
7191 @end ifset
7192
7193 @ifset NS32K
7194 @include c-ns32k.texi
7195 @end ifset
7196
7197 @ifset PDP11
7198 @include c-pdp11.texi
7199 @end ifset
7200
7201 @ifset PJ
7202 @include c-pj.texi
7203 @end ifset
7204
7205 @ifset PPC
7206 @include c-ppc.texi
7207 @end ifset
7208
7209 @ifset RL78
7210 @include c-rl78.texi
7211 @end ifset
7212
7213 @ifset RX
7214 @include c-rx.texi
7215 @end ifset
7216
7217 @ifset S390
7218 @include c-s390.texi
7219 @end ifset
7220
7221 @ifset SCORE
7222 @include c-score.texi
7223 @end ifset
7224
7225 @ifset SH
7226 @include c-sh.texi
7227 @include c-sh64.texi
7228 @end ifset
7229
7230 @ifset SPARC
7231 @include c-sparc.texi
7232 @end ifset
7233
7234 @ifset TIC54X
7235 @include c-tic54x.texi
7236 @end ifset
7237
7238 @ifset TIC6X
7239 @include c-tic6x.texi
7240 @end ifset
7241
7242 @ifset TILEGX
7243 @include c-tilegx.texi
7244 @end ifset
7245
7246 @ifset TILEPRO
7247 @include c-tilepro.texi
7248 @end ifset
7249
7250 @ifset Z80
7251 @include c-z80.texi
7252 @end ifset
7253
7254 @ifset Z8000
7255 @include c-z8k.texi
7256 @end ifset
7257
7258 @ifset VAX
7259 @include c-vax.texi
7260 @end ifset
7261
7262 @ifset V850
7263 @include c-v850.texi
7264 @end ifset
7265
7266 @ifset XGATE
7267 @include c-xgate.texi
7268 @end ifset
7269
7270 @ifset XSTORMY16
7271 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7272 @end ifset
7273
7274 @ifset XTENSA
7275 @include c-xtensa.texi
7276 @end ifset
7277
7278 @ifset GENERIC
7279 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7280 @raisesections
7281 @end ifset
7282
7283 @node Reporting Bugs
7284 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7285 @cindex bugs in assembler
7286 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7287
7288 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7289
7290 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7291 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7292 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7293 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7294
7295 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7296 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7297
7298 @menu
7299 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7300 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7301 @end menu
7302
7303 @node Bug Criteria
7304 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7305 @cindex bug criteria
7306
7307 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7308
7309 @itemize @bullet
7310 @cindex fatal signal
7311 @cindex assembler crash
7312 @cindex crash of assembler
7313 @item
7314 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7315 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7316
7317 @cindex error on valid input
7318 @item
7319 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7320
7321 @cindex invalid input
7322 @item
7323 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7324 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7325 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7326
7327 @item
7328 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7329 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7330 @end itemize
7331
7332 @node Bug Reporting
7333 @section How to Report Bugs
7334 @cindex bug reports
7335 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7336
7337 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7338 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7339 contact that organization first.
7340
7341 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7342 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7343 distribution.
7344
7345 @ifset BUGURL
7346 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7347 to @value{BUGURL}.
7348 @end ifset
7349
7350 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7351 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7352 fact or leave it out, state it!
7353
7354 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7355 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7356 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7357 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7358 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7359 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7360 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7361 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7362 and the most helpful.
7363
7364 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7365 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7366 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7367
7368 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7369 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7370 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7371 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7372
7373 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7374
7375 @itemize @bullet
7376 @item
7377 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7378 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7379
7380 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7381 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7382
7383 @item
7384 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7385
7386 @item
7387 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7388 version number.
7389
7390 @item
7391 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7392 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7393
7394 @item
7395 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7396 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7397 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7398
7399 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7400 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7401
7402 @item
7403 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7404 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7405 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7406 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7407 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7408 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7409 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7410
7411 @item
7412 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7413 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7414
7415 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7416 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7417 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7418 make a mistake.
7419
7420 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7421 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7422 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7423 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7424 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7425 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7426 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7427 observations.
7428
7429 @item
7430 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7431 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7432 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7433 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7434 by line number.
7435
7436 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7437 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7438 @end itemize
7439
7440 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7441
7442 @itemize @bullet
7443 @item
7444 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7445
7446 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7447 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7448 changes will not affect it.
7449
7450 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7451 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7452 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7453 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7454
7455 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7456 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7457 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7458 less time, and so on.
7459
7460 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7461 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7462
7463 @item
7464 A patch for the bug.
7465
7466 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7467 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7468 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7469 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7470
7471 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7472 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7473 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7474 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7475
7476 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7477 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7478 help us to understand.
7479
7480 @item
7481 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7482
7483 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7484 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7485 @end itemize
7486
7487 @node Acknowledgements
7488 @chapter Acknowledgements
7489
7490 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7491 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7492 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7493 @c (January 1994),
7494 the maintainer is Ken Raeburn (email address @code{raeburn@@cygnus.com}).
7495
7496 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7497 more details?}
7498
7499 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7500 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7501 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7502
7503 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7504 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7505 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7506 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7507 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7508 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7509 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7510 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7511 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7512 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7513
7514 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7515 in format-specific I/O modules.
7516
7517 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7518 has done much work with it since.
7519
7520 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7521
7522 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7523
7524 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7525 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7526
7527 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7528 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7529 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7530 support a.out format.
7531
7532 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7533 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7534 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7535 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7536 targets.
7537
7538 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7539 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7540 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7541 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7542 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7543 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7544 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7545
7546 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7547 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7548 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7549 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7550
7551 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7552
7553 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7554
7555 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7556 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7557 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7558 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7559
7560 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7561 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7562 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7563 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7564 and some initial 64-bit support).
7565
7566 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7567
7568 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7569 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7570
7571 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7572 flavors.
7573
7574 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7575 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7576
7577 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7578 configuration enhancements.
7579
7580 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7581
7582 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7583 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7584 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7585 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7586
7587 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7588 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7589 @include fdl.texi
7590
7591 @node AS Index
7592 @unnumbered AS Index
7593
7594 @printindex cp
7595
7596 @bye
7597 @c Local Variables:
7598 @c fill-column: 79
7599 @c End:
This page took 0.19477 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.